* gdb.texinfo: Update dates and versions, fix comments about
[binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdb.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995
3 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @c
5 @c %**start of header
6 @c makeinfo ignores cmds prev to setfilename, so its arg cannot make use
7 @c of @set vars. However, you can override filename with makeinfo -o.
8 @setfilename gdb.info
9 @c
10 @include gdb-cfg.texi
11 @c
12 @ifset GENERIC
13 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN}
14 @end ifset
15 @ifclear GENERIC
16 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN} (@value{TARGET})
17 @end ifclear
18 @setchapternewpage odd
19 @c %**end of header
20
21 @iftex
22 @c @smallbook
23 @c @cropmarks
24 @end iftex
25
26 @finalout
27 @syncodeindex ky cp
28
29 @c readline appendices use @vindex
30 @syncodeindex vr cp
31
32 @c !!set GDB manual's edition---not the same as GDB version!
33 @set EDITION 4.12
34
35 @c !!set GDB manual's revision date
36 @set DATE January 1994
37
38 @c GDB CHANGELOG CONSULTED BETWEEN:
39 @c Fri Oct 11 23:27:06 1991 John Gilmore (gnu at cygnus.com)
40 @c Sat Dec 22 02:51:40 1990 John Gilmore (gnu at cygint)
41
42 @c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO-2 macros and info-makers to format properly.
43
44 @ifinfo
45 @c This is a dir.info fragment to support semi-automated addition of
46 @c manuals to an info tree. zoo@cygnus.com is developing this facility.
47 @format
48 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
49 * Gdb: (gdb). The GNU debugger.
50 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
51 @end format
52 @end ifinfo
53 @c
54 @c
55 @ifinfo
56 This file documents the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
57
58
59 This is Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE},
60 of @cite{Debugging with @value{GDBN}: the GNU Source-Level Debugger}
61 for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
62
63 Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995
64 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
65
66 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
67 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
68 are preserved on all copies.
69
70 @ignore
71 Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
72 results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
73 notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
74 (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
75
76 @end ignore
77 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
78 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
79 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
80 permission notice identical to this one.
81
82 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
83 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
84 @end ifinfo
85
86 @titlepage
87 @title Debugging with @value{GDBN}
88 @subtitle The GNU Source-Level Debugger
89 @ifclear GENERIC
90 @subtitle (@value{TARGET})
91 @end ifclear
92 @sp 1
93 @subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, for @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN}
94 @subtitle @value{DATE}
95 @author Richard M. Stallman and Roland H. Pesch
96 @page
97 @tex
98 {\parskip=0pt
99 \hfill (Send bugs and comments on @value{GDBN} to bug-gdb\@prep.ai.mit.edu.)\par
100 \hfill {\it Debugging with @value{GDBN}}\par
101 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
102 \hfill pesch\@cygnus.com\par
103 }
104 @end tex
105
106 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
107 Copyright @copyright{} 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995
108 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
109 @sp 2
110 Published by the Free Software Foundation @*
111 675 Massachusetts Avenue, @*
112 Cambridge, MA 02139 USA @*
113 Printed copies are available for $20 each. @*
114 ISBN 1-882114-11-6 @*
115
116 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
117 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
118 are preserved on all copies.
119
120 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
121 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
122 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
123 permission notice identical to this one.
124
125 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
126 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
127 @end titlepage
128 @page
129
130 @ifinfo
131 @node Top
132 @top Debugging with @value{GDBN}
133
134 This file describes @value{GDBN}, the GNU symbolic debugger.
135
136 This is Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE}, for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
137
138 @menu
139 * Summary:: Summary of @value{GDBN}
140 @ifset NOVEL
141 * New Features:: New features since GDB version 3.5
142 @end ifset
143 @ifclear BARETARGET
144 * Sample Session:: A sample @value{GDBN} session
145 @end ifclear
146
147 * Invocation:: Getting in and out of @value{GDBN}
148 * Commands:: @value{GDBN} commands
149 * Running:: Running programs under @value{GDBN}
150 * Stopping:: Stopping and continuing
151 * Stack:: Examining the stack
152 * Source:: Examining source files
153 * Data:: Examining data
154 @ifclear CONLY
155 * Languages:: Using @value{GDBN} with different languages
156 @end ifclear
157 @ifset CONLY
158 * C:: C language support
159 @end ifset
160 @c remnant makeinfo bug, blank line needed after two end-ifs?
161
162 * Symbols:: Examining the symbol table
163 * Altering:: Altering execution
164 * GDB Files:: @value{GDBN} files
165 * Targets:: Specifying a debugging target
166 * Controlling GDB:: Controlling @value{GDBN}
167 * Sequences:: Canned sequences of commands
168 @ifclear DOSHOST
169 * Emacs:: Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
170 @end ifclear
171
172 * GDB Bugs:: Reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
173 * Command Line Editing:: Facilities of the readline library
174 * Using History Interactively::
175 @ifset NOVEL
176 * Renamed Commands::
177 @end ifset
178 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
179 * Formatting Documentation:: How to format and print GDB documentation
180 * Installing GDB:: Installing GDB
181 @end ifclear
182
183 * Index:: Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifinfo
186
187 @node Summary
188 @unnumbered Summary of @value{GDBN}
189
190 The purpose of a debugger such as @value{GDBN} is to allow you to see what is
191 going on ``inside'' another program while it executes---or what another
192 program was doing at the moment it crashed.
193
194 @value{GDBN} can do four main kinds of things (plus other things in support of
195 these) to help you catch bugs in the act:
196
197 @itemize @bullet
198 @item
199 Start your program, specifying anything that might affect its behavior.
200
201 @item
202 Make your program stop on specified conditions.
203
204 @item
205 Examine what has happened, when your program has stopped.
206
207 @item
208 Change things in your program, so you can experiment with correcting the
209 effects of one bug and go on to learn about another.
210 @end itemize
211
212 @ifclear CONLY
213 You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C or C++.
214 @c "MOD2" used as a "miscellaneous languages" flag here.
215 @c This is acceptable while there is no real doc for Chill and Pascal.
216 @ifclear MOD2
217 For more information, see @ref{Support,,Supported languages}.
218 @end ifclear
219 @ifset MOD2
220 For more information, see @ref{C,,C and C++}.
221
222 Support for Modula-2 and Chill is partial. For information on Modula-2,
223 see @ref{Modula-2,,Modula-2}. There is no further documentation on Chill yet.
224
225 Debugging Pascal programs which use sets, subranges, file variables, or nested
226 functions does not currently work. @value{GDBN} does not support
227 entering expressions, printing values, or similar features using Pascal syntax.
228 @end ifset
229 @ifset FORTRAN
230 @cindex Fortran
231 @value{GDBN} can be used to debug programs written in Fortran, although
232 it does not yet support entering expressions, printing values, or
233 similar features using Fortran syntax. It may be necessary to refer to
234 some variables with a trailing underscore.
235 @end ifset
236 @end ifclear
237
238 @menu
239 * Free Software:: Freely redistributable software
240 * Contributors:: Contributors to GDB
241 @end menu
242
243 @node Free Software
244 @unnumberedsec Free software
245
246 @value{GDBN} is @dfn{free software}, protected by the GNU General Public License
247 (GPL). The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
248 program---but every person getting a copy also gets with it the
249 freedom to modify that copy (which means that they must get access to
250 the source code), and the freedom to distribute further copies.
251 Typical software companies use copyrights to limit your freedoms; the
252 Free Software Foundation uses the GPL to preserve these freedoms.
253
254 Fundamentally, the General Public License is a license which says that
255 you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms away
256 from anyone else.
257
258 @node Contributors
259 @unnumberedsec Contributors to GDB
260
261 Richard Stallman was the original author of GDB, and of many other GNU
262 programs. Many others have contributed to its development. This
263 section attempts to credit major contributors. One of the virtues of
264 free software is that everyone is free to contribute to it; with
265 regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here. The file
266 @file{ChangeLog} in the GDB distribution approximates a blow-by-blow
267 account.
268
269 Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.
270
271 @quotation
272 @emph{Plea:} Additions to this section are particularly welcome. If you
273 or your friends (or enemies, to be evenhanded) have been unfairly
274 omitted from this list, we would like to add your names!
275 @end quotation
276
277 So that they may not regard their long labor as thankless, we
278 particularly thank those who shepherded GDB through major releases:
279 Stan Shebs (release 4.14),
280 Fred Fish (releases 4.13, 4.12, 4.11, 4.10, and 4.9),
281 Stu Grossman and John Gilmore (releases 4.8, 4.7, 4.6, 4.5, and 4.4),
282 John Gilmore (releases 4.3, 4.2, 4.1, 4.0, and 3.9);
283 Jim Kingdon (releases 3.5, 3.4, and 3.3);
284 and Randy Smith (releases 3.2, 3.1, and 3.0).
285 As major maintainer of GDB for some period, each
286 contributed significantly to the structure, stability, and capabilities
287 of the entire debugger.
288
289 Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Peter TerMaat, Chris
290 Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.
291
292 @ifclear CONLY
293 Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the GNU C++ support in GDB,
294 with significant additional contributions from Per Bothner. James
295 Clark wrote the GNU C++ demangler. Early work on C++ was by Peter
296 TerMaat (who also did much general update work leading to release 3.0).
297 @end ifclear
298
299 GDB 4 uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
300 object-file formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.
301 Henkel-Wallace, Rich Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.
302
303 David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did
304 the original support for encapsulated COFF.
305
306 Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
307 Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
308 support.
309 Jean-Daniel Fekete contributed Sun 386i support.
310 Chris Hanson improved the HP9000 support.
311 Noboyuki Hikichi and Tomoyuki Hasei contributed Sony/News OS 3 support.
312 David Johnson contributed Encore Umax support.
313 Jyrki Kuoppala contributed Altos 3068 support.
314 Jeff Law contributed HP PA and SOM support.
315 Keith Packard contributed NS32K support.
316 Doug Rabson contributed Acorn Risc Machine support.
317 Bob Rusk contributed Harris Nighthawk CX-UX support.
318 Chris Smith contributed Convex support (and Fortran debugging).
319 Jonathan Stone contributed Pyramid support.
320 Michael Tiemann contributed SPARC support.
321 Tim Tucker contributed support for the Gould NP1 and Gould Powernode.
322 Pace Willison contributed Intel 386 support.
323 Jay Vosburgh contributed Symmetry support.
324
325 Rich Schaefer and Peter Schauer helped with support of SunOS shared
326 libraries.
327
328 Jay Fenlason and Roland McGrath ensured that GDB and GAS agree about
329 several machine instruction sets.
330
331 Patrick Duval, Ted Goldstein, Vikram Koka and Glenn Engel helped
332 develop remote debugging. Intel Corporation and Wind River Systems
333 contributed remote debugging modules for their products.
334
335 Brian Fox is the author of the readline libraries providing
336 command-line editing and command history.
337
338 Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code,
339 @ifset MOD2
340 the Modula-2 support,
341 @end ifset
342 and contributed the Languages chapter of this manual.
343
344 Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.
345 @ifclear CONLY
346 He also enhanced the command-completion support to cover C++ overloaded
347 symbols.
348 @end ifclear
349
350 Hitachi America, Ltd. sponsored the support for Hitachi microprocessors.
351
352 Kung Hsu, Jeff Law, and Rick Sladkey added support for hardware
353 watchpoints.
354
355 Stu Grossman wrote gdbserver.
356
357 Jim Kingdon, Peter Schauer, Ian Taylor, and Stu Grossman made
358 nearly innumerable bug fixes and cleanups throughout GDB.
359
360 @ifset NOVEL
361 @node New Features
362 @unnumbered New Features since GDB Version 3.5
363
364 @table @emph
365 @item Targets
366 Using the new command @code{target}, you can select at runtime whether
367 you are debugging local files, local processes, standalone systems over
368 a serial port, or realtime systems over a TCP/IP connection. The
369 command @code{load} can download programs into a remote system. Serial
370 stubs are available for Motorola 680x0, Intel 80386, and Sparc remote
371 systems; GDB also supports debugging realtime processes running under
372 VxWorks, using SunRPC Remote Procedure Calls over TCP/IP to talk to a
373 debugger stub on the target system. Internally, GDB now uses a function
374 vector to mediate access to different targets; if you need to add your
375 own support for a remote protocol, this makes it much easier.
376
377 @item Watchpoints
378 GDB now sports watchpoints as well as breakpoints. You can use a
379 watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an expression
380 changes, without having to predict a particular place in your program
381 where this may happen.
382
383 @item Wide Output
384 Commands that issue wide output now insert newlines at places designed
385 to make the output more readable.
386
387 @item Object Code Formats
388 GDB uses a new library called the Binary File Descriptor (BFD) Library
389 to permit it to switch dynamically, without reconfiguration or
390 recompilation, between different object-file formats. Formats currently
391 supported are COFF, ELF, a.out, Intel 960 b.out, MIPS ECOFF, HPPA SOM
392 (with stabs debugging), and S-records; files may be read as .o files,
393 archive libraries, or core dumps. BFD is available as a subroutine
394 library so that other programs may take advantage of it, and the other
395 GNU binary utilities are being converted to use it.
396
397 @item Configuration and Ports
398 Compile-time configuration (to select a particular architecture and
399 operating system) is much easier. The script @code{configure} now
400 allows you to configure GDB as either a native debugger or a
401 cross-debugger. @xref{Installing GDB}, for details on how to
402 configure.
403
404 @item Interaction
405 The user interface to the GDB control variables is simpler,
406 and is consolidated in two commands, @code{set} and @code{show}. Output
407 lines are now broken at readable places, rather than overflowing onto
408 the next line. You can suppress output of machine-level addresses,
409 displaying only source language information.
410
411 @item C++
412 GDB now supports C++ multiple inheritance (if used with a GCC
413 version 2 compiler), and also has limited support for C++ exception
414 handling, with the commands @code{catch} and @code{info catch}: GDB
415 can break when an exception is raised, before the stack is peeled back
416 to the exception handler's context.
417
418 @ifset MOD2
419 @item Modula-2
420 GDB now has preliminary support for the GNU Modula-2 compiler, currently
421 under development at the State University of New York at Buffalo.
422 Coordinated development of both GDB and the GNU Modula-2 compiler will
423 continue. Other Modula-2 compilers are currently not supported, and
424 attempting to debug programs compiled with them will likely result in an
425 error as the symbol table of the executable is read in.
426 @end ifset
427
428 @item Command Rationalization
429 Many GDB commands have been renamed to make them easier to remember
430 and use. In particular, the subcommands of @code{info} and
431 @code{show}/@code{set} are grouped to make the former refer to the state
432 of your program, and the latter refer to the state of GDB itself.
433 @xref{Renamed Commands}, for details on what commands were renamed.
434
435 @item Shared Libraries
436 GDB 4 can debug programs and core files that use SunOS, SVR4, or IBM RS/6000
437 shared libraries.
438
439 @item Threads
440 On some systems, GDB 4 has facilities to debug multi-thread programs.
441
442 @item Reference Card
443 GDB 4 has a reference card. @xref{Formatting Documentation,,Formatting
444 the Documentation}, for instructions about how to print it.
445 @end table
446 @end ifset
447
448 @ifclear BARETARGET
449 @node Sample Session
450 @chapter A Sample @value{GDBN} Session
451
452 You can use this manual at your leisure to read all about @value{GDBN}.
453 However, a handful of commands are enough to get started using the
454 debugger. This chapter illustrates those commands.
455
456 @iftex
457 In this sample session, we emphasize user input like this: @b{input},
458 to make it easier to pick out from the surrounding output.
459 @end iftex
460
461 @c FIXME: this example may not be appropriate for some configs, where
462 @c FIXME...primary interest is in remote use.
463
464 One of the preliminary versions of GNU @code{m4} (a generic macro
465 processor) exhibits the following bug: sometimes, when we change its
466 quote strings from the default, the commands used to capture one macro
467 definition within another stop working. In the following short @code{m4}
468 session, we define a macro @code{foo} which expands to @code{0000}; we
469 then use the @code{m4} built-in @code{defn} to define @code{bar} as the
470 same thing. However, when we change the open quote string to
471 @code{<QUOTE>} and the close quote string to @code{<UNQUOTE>}, the same
472 procedure fails to define a new synonym @code{baz}:
473
474 @smallexample
475 $ @b{cd gnu/m4}
476 $ @b{./m4}
477 @b{define(foo,0000)}
478
479 @b{foo}
480 0000
481 @b{define(bar,defn(`foo'))}
482
483 @b{bar}
484 0000
485 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
486
487 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
488 @b{baz}
489 @b{C-d}
490 m4: End of input: 0: fatal error: EOF in string
491 @end smallexample
492
493 @noindent
494 Let us use @value{GDBN} to try to see what is going on.
495
496 @smallexample
497 $ @b{@value{GDBP} m4}
498 @c FIXME: this falsifies the exact text played out, to permit smallbook
499 @c FIXME... format to come out better.
500 GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
501 of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
502 the conditions.
503 There is absolutely no warranty for GDB; type "show warranty"
504 for details.
505 GDB @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
506 (@value{GDBP})
507 @end smallexample
508
509 @noindent
510 @value{GDBN} reads only enough symbol data to know where to find the
511 rest when needed; as a result, the first prompt comes up very quickly.
512 We now tell @value{GDBN} to use a narrower display width than usual, so
513 that examples fit in this manual.
514
515 @smallexample
516 (@value{GDBP}) @b{set width 70}
517 @end smallexample
518
519 @noindent
520 We need to see how the @code{m4} built-in @code{changequote} works.
521 Having looked at the source, we know the relevant subroutine is
522 @code{m4_changequote}, so we set a breakpoint there with the @value{GDBN}
523 @code{break} command.
524
525 @smallexample
526 (@value{GDBP}) @b{break m4_changequote}
527 Breakpoint 1 at 0x62f4: file builtin.c, line 879.
528 @end smallexample
529
530 @noindent
531 Using the @code{run} command, we start @code{m4} running under @value{GDBN}
532 control; as long as control does not reach the @code{m4_changequote}
533 subroutine, the program runs as usual:
534
535 @smallexample
536 (@value{GDBP}) @b{run}
537 Starting program: /work/Editorial/gdb/gnu/m4/m4
538 @b{define(foo,0000)}
539
540 @b{foo}
541 0000
542 @end smallexample
543
544 @noindent
545 To trigger the breakpoint, we call @code{changequote}. @value{GDBN}
546 suspends execution of @code{m4}, displaying information about the
547 context where it stops.
548
549 @smallexample
550 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
551
552 Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
553 at builtin.c:879
554 879 if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))
555 @end smallexample
556
557 @noindent
558 Now we use the command @code{n} (@code{next}) to advance execution to
559 the next line of the current function.
560
561 @smallexample
562 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
563 882 set_quotes((argc >= 2) ? TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[1])\
564 : nil,
565 @end smallexample
566
567 @noindent
568 @code{set_quotes} looks like a promising subroutine. We can go into it
569 by using the command @code{s} (@code{step}) instead of @code{next}.
570 @code{step} goes to the next line to be executed in @emph{any}
571 subroutine, so it steps into @code{set_quotes}.
572
573 @smallexample
574 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
575 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
576 at input.c:530
577 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
578 @end smallexample
579
580 @noindent
581 The display that shows the subroutine where @code{m4} is now
582 suspended (and its arguments) is called a stack frame display. It
583 shows a summary of the stack. We can use the @code{backtrace}
584 command (which can also be spelled @code{bt}), to see where we are
585 in the stack as a whole: the @code{backtrace} command displays a
586 stack frame for each active subroutine.
587
588 @smallexample
589 (@value{GDBP}) @b{bt}
590 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
591 at input.c:530
592 #1 0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
593 at builtin.c:882
594 #2 0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
595 #3 0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
596 at macro.c:71
597 #4 0x79dc in expand_input () at macro.c:40
598 #5 0x2930 in main (argc=0, argv=0xf7fffb20) at m4.c:195
599 @end smallexample
600
601 @noindent
602 We step through a few more lines to see what happens. The first two
603 times, we can use @samp{s}; the next two times we use @code{n} to avoid
604 falling into the @code{xstrdup} subroutine.
605
606 @smallexample
607 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
608 0x3b5c 532 if (rquote != def_rquote)
609 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
610 0x3b80 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? \
611 def_lquote : xstrdup(lq);
612 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
613 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
614 : xstrdup(rq);
615 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
616 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
617 @end smallexample
618
619 @noindent
620 The last line displayed looks a little odd; we can examine the variables
621 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} to see if they are in fact the new left
622 and right quotes we specified. We use the command @code{p}
623 (@code{print}) to see their values.
624
625 @smallexample
626 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p lquote}
627 $1 = 0x35d40 "<QUOTE>"
628 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p rquote}
629 $2 = 0x35d50 "<UNQUOTE>"
630 @end smallexample
631
632 @noindent
633 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} are indeed the new left and right quotes.
634 To look at some context, we can display ten lines of source
635 surrounding the current line with the @code{l} (@code{list}) command.
636
637 @smallexample
638 (@value{GDBP}) @b{l}
639 533 xfree(rquote);
640 534
641 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? def_lquote\
642 : xstrdup (lq);
643 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
644 : xstrdup (rq);
645 537
646 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
647 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
648 540 @}
649 541
650 542 void
651 @end smallexample
652
653 @noindent
654 Let us step past the two lines that set @code{len_lquote} and
655 @code{len_rquote}, and then examine the values of those variables.
656
657 @smallexample
658 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
659 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
660 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
661 540 @}
662 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote}
663 $3 = 9
664 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote}
665 $4 = 7
666 @end smallexample
667
668 @noindent
669 That certainly looks wrong, assuming @code{len_lquote} and
670 @code{len_rquote} are meant to be the lengths of @code{lquote} and
671 @code{rquote} respectively. We can set them to better values using
672 the @code{p} command, since it can print the value of
673 any expression---and that expression can include subroutine calls and
674 assignments.
675
676 @smallexample
677 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote=strlen(lquote)}
678 $5 = 7
679 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote=strlen(rquote)}
680 $6 = 9
681 @end smallexample
682
683 @noindent
684 Is that enough to fix the problem of using the new quotes with the
685 @code{m4} built-in @code{defn}? We can allow @code{m4} to continue
686 executing with the @code{c} (@code{continue}) command, and then try the
687 example that caused trouble initially:
688
689 @smallexample
690 (@value{GDBP}) @b{c}
691 Continuing.
692
693 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
694
695 baz
696 0000
697 @end smallexample
698
699 @noindent
700 Success! The new quotes now work just as well as the default ones. The
701 problem seems to have been just the two typos defining the wrong
702 lengths. We allow @code{m4} exit by giving it an EOF as input:
703
704 @smallexample
705 @b{C-d}
706 Program exited normally.
707 @end smallexample
708
709 @noindent
710 The message @samp{Program exited normally.} is from @value{GDBN}; it
711 indicates @code{m4} has finished executing. We can end our @value{GDBN}
712 session with the @value{GDBN} @code{quit} command.
713
714 @smallexample
715 (@value{GDBP}) @b{quit}
716 @end smallexample
717 @end ifclear
718
719 @node Invocation
720 @chapter Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}
721
722 This chapter discusses how to start @value{GDBN}, and how to get out of it.
723 (The essentials: type @samp{@value{GDBP}} to start GDB, and type @kbd{quit}
724 or @kbd{C-d} to exit.)
725
726 @menu
727 * Invoking GDB:: How to start @value{GDBN}
728 * Quitting GDB:: How to quit @value{GDBN}
729 * Shell Commands:: How to use shell commands inside @value{GDBN}
730 @end menu
731
732 @node Invoking GDB
733 @section Invoking @value{GDBN}
734
735 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
736 For details on starting up @value{GDBP} as a
737 remote debugger attached to a Hitachi microprocessor, see @ref{Hitachi
738 Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
739 @end ifset
740
741 Invoke @value{GDBN} by running the program @code{@value{GDBP}}. Once started,
742 @value{GDBN} reads commands from the terminal until you tell it to exit.
743
744 You can also run @code{@value{GDBP}} with a variety of arguments and options,
745 to specify more of your debugging environment at the outset.
746
747 @ifset GENERIC
748 The command-line options described here are designed
749 to cover a variety of situations; in some environments, some of these
750 options may effectively be unavailable.
751 @end ifset
752
753 The most usual way to start @value{GDBN} is with one argument,
754 specifying an executable program:
755
756 @example
757 @value{GDBP} @var{program}
758 @end example
759
760 @ifclear BARETARGET
761 @noindent
762 You can also start with both an executable program and a core file
763 specified:
764
765 @example
766 @value{GDBP} @var{program} @var{core}
767 @end example
768
769 You can, instead, specify a process ID as a second argument, if you want
770 to debug a running process:
771
772 @example
773 @value{GDBP} @var{program} 1234
774 @end example
775
776 @noindent
777 would attach @value{GDBN} to process @code{1234} (unless you also have a file
778 named @file{1234}; @value{GDBN} does check for a core file first).
779
780 Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a fairly
781 complete operating system; when you use @value{GDBN} as a remote debugger
782 attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of ``process'',
783 and there is often no way to get a core dump.
784 @end ifclear
785
786 @noindent
787 You can further control how @value{GDBN} starts up by using command-line
788 options. @value{GDBN} itself can remind you of the options available.
789
790 @noindent
791 Type
792
793 @example
794 @value{GDBP} -help
795 @end example
796
797 @noindent
798 to display all available options and briefly describe their use
799 (@samp{@value{GDBP} -h} is a shorter equivalent).
800
801 All options and command line arguments you give are processed
802 in sequential order. The order makes a difference when the
803 @samp{-x} option is used.
804
805
806 @menu
807 @ifclear GENERIC
808 @ifset REMOTESTUB
809 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
810 @end ifset
811 @ifset I960
812 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
813 @end ifset
814 @ifset AMD29K
815 * UDI29K Remote:: The UDI protocol for AMD29K
816 * EB29K Remote:: The EBMON protocol for AMD29K
817 @end ifset
818 @ifset VXWORKS
819 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
820 @end ifset
821 @ifset ST2000
822 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
823 @end ifset
824 @ifset H8
825 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
826 @end ifset
827 @ifset MIPS
828 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
829 @end ifset
830 @ifset SIMS
831 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
832 @end ifset
833 @end ifclear
834 @c remnant makeinfo bug requires this blank line after *two* end-ifblahs:
835
836 * File Options:: Choosing files
837 * Mode Options:: Choosing modes
838 @end menu
839
840 @ifclear GENERIC
841 @include remote.texi
842 @end ifclear
843
844 @node File Options
845 @subsection Choosing files
846
847 @ifclear BARETARGET
848 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
849 specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID). This is
850 the same as if the arguments were specified by the @samp{-se} and
851 @samp{-c} options respectively. (@value{GDBN} reads the first argument
852 that does not have an associated option flag as equivalent to the
853 @samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the second argument
854 that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as equivalent to
855 the @samp{-c} option followed by that argument.)
856 @end ifclear
857 @ifset BARETARGET
858 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any argument other than options as
859 specifying an executable file. This is the same as if the argument was
860 specified by the @samp{-se} option.
861 @end ifset
862
863 Many options have both long and short forms; both are shown in the
864 following list. @value{GDBN} also recognizes the long forms if you truncate
865 them, so long as enough of the option is present to be unambiguous.
866 (If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with @samp{--} rather
867 than @samp{-}, though we illustrate the more usual convention.)
868
869 @table @code
870 @item -symbols @var{file}
871 @itemx -s @var{file}
872 Read symbol table from file @var{file}.
873
874 @item -exec @var{file}
875 @itemx -e @var{file}
876 Use file @var{file} as the executable file to execute when
877 @ifset BARETARGET
878 appropriate.
879 @end ifset
880 @ifclear BARETARGET
881 appropriate, and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core
882 dump.
883 @end ifclear
884
885 @item -se @var{file}
886 Read symbol table from file @var{file} and use it as the executable
887 file.
888
889 @ifclear BARETARGET
890 @item -core @var{file}
891 @itemx -c @var{file}
892 Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
893
894 @item -c @var{number}
895 Connect to process ID @var{number}, as with the @code{attach} command
896 (unless there is a file in core-dump format named @var{number}, in which
897 case @samp{-c} specifies that file as a core dump to read).
898 @end ifclear
899
900 @item -command @var{file}
901 @itemx -x @var{file}
902 Execute @value{GDBN} commands from file @var{file}. @xref{Command
903 Files,, Command files}.
904
905 @item -directory @var{directory}
906 @itemx -d @var{directory}
907 Add @var{directory} to the path to search for source files.
908
909 @ifclear BARETARGET
910 @item -m
911 @itemx -mapped
912 @emph{Warning: this option depends on operating system facilities that are not
913 supported on all systems.}@*
914 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the @code{mmap}
915 system call, you can use this option
916 to have @value{GDBN} write the symbols from your
917 program into a reusable file in the current directory. If the program you are debugging is
918 called @file{/tmp/fred}, the mapped symbol file is @file{./fred.syms}.
919 Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions notice the presence of this file,
920 and can quickly map in symbol information from it, rather than reading
921 the symbol table from the executable program.
922
923 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
924 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where @value{GDBN}
925 is run. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN} symbol
926 table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
927 @end ifclear
928
929 @item -r
930 @itemx -readnow
931 Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather than
932 the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is needed.
933 This makes startup slower, but makes future operations faster.
934 @end table
935
936 @ifclear BARETARGET
937 The @code{-mapped} and @code{-readnow} options are typically combined in
938 order to build a @file{.syms} file that contains complete symbol
939 information. (@xref{Files,,Commands to specify files}, for information
940 on @file{.syms} files.) A simple GDB invocation to do nothing but build
941 a @file{.syms} file for future use is:
942
943 @example
944 gdb -batch -nx -mapped -readnow programname
945 @end example
946 @end ifclear
947
948 @node Mode Options
949 @subsection Choosing modes
950
951 You can run @value{GDBN} in various alternative modes---for example, in
952 batch mode or quiet mode.
953
954 @table @code
955 @item -nx
956 @itemx -n
957 Do not execute commands from any initialization files (normally called
958 @file{@value{GDBINIT}}). Normally, the commands in these files are
959 executed after all the command options and arguments have been
960 processed. @xref{Command Files,,Command files}.
961
962 @item -quiet
963 @itemx -q
964 ``Quiet''. Do not print the introductory and copyright messages. These
965 messages are also suppressed in batch mode.
966
967 @item -batch
968 Run in batch mode. Exit with status @code{0} after processing all the
969 command files specified with @samp{-x} (and all commands from
970 initialization files, if not inhibited with @samp{-n}). Exit with
971 nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the @value{GDBN} commands
972 in the command files.
973
974 Batch mode may be useful for running @value{GDBN} as a filter, for example to
975 download and run a program on another computer; in order to make this
976 more useful, the message
977
978 @example
979 Program exited normally.
980 @end example
981
982 @noindent
983 (which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under @value{GDBN} control
984 terminates) is not issued when running in batch mode.
985
986 @item -cd @var{directory}
987 Run @value{GDBN} using @var{directory} as its working directory,
988 instead of the current directory.
989
990 @ifset LUCID
991 @item -context @var{authentication}
992 When the Energize programming system starts up @value{GDBN}, it uses this
993 option to trigger an alternate mode of interaction.
994 @var{authentication} is a pair of numeric codes that identify @value{GDBN}
995 as a client in the Energize environment. Avoid this option when you run
996 @value{GDBN} directly from the command line. See @ref{Energize,,Using
997 @value{GDBN} with Energize} for more discussion of using @value{GDBN} with Energize.
998 @end ifset
999
1000 @ifclear DOSHOST
1001 @item -fullname
1002 @itemx -f
1003 Emacs sets this option when it runs @value{GDBN} as a subprocess. It tells @value{GDBN}
1004 to output the full file name and line number in a standard,
1005 recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is displayed (which
1006 includes each time your program stops). This recognizable format looks
1007 like two @samp{\032} characters, followed by the file name, line number
1008 and character position separated by colons, and a newline. The
1009 Emacs-to-@value{GDBN} interface program uses the two @samp{\032} characters as
1010 a signal to display the source code for the frame.
1011 @end ifclear
1012
1013 @ifset SERIAL
1014 @item -b @var{bps}
1015 Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
1016 interface used by @value{GDBN} for remote debugging.
1017
1018 @item -tty @var{device}
1019 Run using @var{device} for your program's standard input and output.
1020 @c FIXME: kingdon thinks there is more to -tty. Investigate.
1021 @end ifset
1022 @end table
1023
1024 @node Quitting GDB
1025 @section Quitting @value{GDBN}
1026 @cindex exiting @value{GDBN}
1027 @cindex leaving @value{GDBN}
1028
1029 @table @code
1030 @item quit
1031 @kindex quit
1032 @kindex q
1033 To exit @value{GDBN}, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated @code{q}), or type
1034 an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{C-d}).
1035 @end table
1036
1037 @cindex interrupt
1038 An interrupt (often @kbd{C-c}) does not exit from @value{GDBN}, but rather
1039 terminates the action of any @value{GDBN} command that is in progress and
1040 returns to @value{GDBN} command level. It is safe to type the interrupt
1041 character at any time because @value{GDBN} does not allow it to take effect
1042 until a time when it is safe.
1043
1044 @ifclear BARETARGET
1045 If you have been using @value{GDBN} to control an attached process or
1046 device, you can release it with the @code{detach} command
1047 (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an already-running process}).
1048 @end ifclear
1049
1050 @node Shell Commands
1051 @section Shell commands
1052
1053 If you need to execute occasional shell commands during your
1054 debugging session, there is no need to leave or suspend @value{GDBN}; you can
1055 just use the @code{shell} command.
1056
1057 @table @code
1058 @item shell @var{command string}
1059 @kindex shell
1060 @cindex shell escape
1061 Invoke a the standard shell to execute @var{command string}.
1062 @ifclear DOSHOST
1063 If it exists, the environment variable @code{SHELL} determines which
1064 shell to run. Otherwise @value{GDBN} uses @code{/bin/sh}.
1065 @end ifclear
1066 @end table
1067
1068 The utility @code{make} is often needed in development environments.
1069 You do not have to use the @code{shell} command for this purpose in
1070 @value{GDBN}:
1071
1072 @table @code
1073 @item make @var{make-args}
1074 @kindex make
1075 @cindex calling make
1076 Execute the @code{make} program with the specified
1077 arguments. This is equivalent to @samp{shell make @var{make-args}}.
1078 @end table
1079
1080 @node Commands
1081 @chapter @value{GDBN} Commands
1082
1083 You can abbreviate a @value{GDBN} command to the first few letters of the command
1084 name, if that abbreviation is unambiguous; and you can repeat certain
1085 @value{GDBN} commands by typing just @key{RET}. You can also use the @key{TAB}
1086 key to get @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest of a word in a command (or to
1087 show you the alternatives available, if there is more than one possibility).
1088
1089 @menu
1090 * Command Syntax:: How to give commands to @value{GDBN}
1091 * Completion:: Command completion
1092 * Help:: How to ask @value{GDBN} for help
1093 @end menu
1094
1095 @node Command Syntax
1096 @section Command syntax
1097
1098 A @value{GDBN} command is a single line of input. There is no limit on
1099 how long it can be. It starts with a command name, which is followed by
1100 arguments whose meaning depends on the command name. For example, the
1101 command @code{step} accepts an argument which is the number of times to
1102 step, as in @samp{step 5}. You can also use the @code{step} command
1103 with no arguments. Some command names do not allow any arguments.
1104
1105 @cindex abbreviation
1106 @value{GDBN} command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
1107 unambiguous. Other possible command abbreviations are listed in the
1108 documentation for individual commands. In some cases, even ambiguous
1109 abbreviations are allowed; for example, @code{s} is specially defined as
1110 equivalent to @code{step} even though there are other commands whose
1111 names start with @code{s}. You can test abbreviations by using them as
1112 arguments to the @code{help} command.
1113
1114 @cindex repeating commands
1115 @kindex RET
1116 A blank line as input to @value{GDBN} (typing just @key{RET}) means to
1117 repeat the previous command. Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
1118 will not repeat this way; these are commands whose unintentional
1119 repetition might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to
1120 repeat.
1121
1122 The @code{list} and @code{x} commands, when you repeat them with
1123 @key{RET}, construct new arguments rather than repeating
1124 exactly as typed. This permits easy scanning of source or memory.
1125
1126 @value{GDBN} can also use @key{RET} in another way: to partition lengthy
1127 output, in a way similar to the common utility @code{more}
1128 (@pxref{Screen Size,,Screen size}). Since it is easy to press one
1129 @key{RET} too many in this situation, @value{GDBN} disables command
1130 repetition after any command that generates this sort of display.
1131
1132 @kindex #
1133 @cindex comment
1134 Any text from a @kbd{#} to the end of the line is a comment; it does
1135 nothing. This is useful mainly in command files (@pxref{Command
1136 Files,,Command files}).
1137
1138 @node Completion
1139 @section Command completion
1140
1141 @cindex completion
1142 @cindex word completion
1143 @value{GDBN} can fill in the rest of a word in a command for you, if there is
1144 only one possibility; it can also show you what the valid possibilities
1145 are for the next word in a command, at any time. This works for @value{GDBN}
1146 commands, @value{GDBN} subcommands, and the names of symbols in your program.
1147
1148 Press the @key{TAB} key whenever you want @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest
1149 of a word. If there is only one possibility, @value{GDBN} fills in the
1150 word, and waits for you to finish the command (or press @key{RET} to
1151 enter it). For example, if you type
1152
1153 @c FIXME "@key" does not distinguish its argument sufficiently to permit
1154 @c complete accuracy in these examples; space introduced for clarity.
1155 @c If texinfo enhancements make it unnecessary, it would be nice to
1156 @c replace " @key" by "@key" in the following...
1157 @example
1158 (@value{GDBP}) info bre @key{TAB}
1159 @end example
1160
1161 @noindent
1162 @value{GDBN} fills in the rest of the word @samp{breakpoints}, since that is
1163 the only @code{info} subcommand beginning with @samp{bre}:
1164
1165 @example
1166 (@value{GDBP}) info breakpoints
1167 @end example
1168
1169 @noindent
1170 You can either press @key{RET} at this point, to run the @code{info
1171 breakpoints} command, or backspace and enter something else, if
1172 @samp{breakpoints} does not look like the command you expected. (If you
1173 were sure you wanted @code{info breakpoints} in the first place, you
1174 might as well just type @key{RET} immediately after @samp{info bre},
1175 to exploit command abbreviations rather than command completion).
1176
1177 If there is more than one possibility for the next word when you press
1178 @key{TAB}, @value{GDBN} sounds a bell. You can either supply more
1179 characters and try again, or just press @key{TAB} a second time;
1180 @value{GDBN} displays all the possible completions for that word. For
1181 example, you might want to set a breakpoint on a subroutine whose name
1182 begins with @samp{make_}, but when you type @kbd{b make_@key{TAB}} @value{GDBN}
1183 just sounds the bell. Typing @key{TAB} again displays all the
1184 function names in your program that begin with those characters, for
1185 example:
1186
1187 @example
1188 (@value{GDBP}) b make_ @key{TAB}
1189 @exdent @value{GDBN} sounds bell; press @key{TAB} again, to see:
1190 make_a_section_from_file make_environ
1191 make_abs_section make_function_type
1192 make_blockvector make_pointer_type
1193 make_cleanup make_reference_type
1194 make_command make_symbol_completion_list
1195 (@value{GDBP}) b make_
1196 @end example
1197
1198 @noindent
1199 After displaying the available possibilities, @value{GDBN} copies your
1200 partial input (@samp{b make_} in the example) so you can finish the
1201 command.
1202
1203 If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place, you
1204 can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice. @kbd{M-?}
1205 means @kbd{@key{META} ?}. You can type this
1206 @ifclear DOSHOST
1207 either by holding down a
1208 key designated as the @key{META} shift on your keyboard (if there is
1209 one) while typing @kbd{?}, or
1210 @end ifclear
1211 as @key{ESC} followed by @kbd{?}.
1212
1213 @cindex quotes in commands
1214 @cindex completion of quoted strings
1215 Sometimes the string you need, while logically a ``word'', may contain
1216 parentheses or other characters that @value{GDBN} normally excludes from its
1217 notion of a word. To permit word completion to work in this situation,
1218 you may enclose words in @code{'} (single quote marks) in @value{GDBN} commands.
1219
1220 @ifclear CONLY
1221 The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
1222 name of a C++ function. This is because C++ allows function overloading
1223 (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished by argument
1224 type). For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you may need to
1225 distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name} that takes an
1226 @code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version that takes a
1227 @code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}. To use the word-completion
1228 facilities in this situation, type a single quote @code{'} at the
1229 beginning of the function name. This alerts @value{GDBN} that it may need to
1230 consider more information than usual when you press @key{TAB} or
1231 @kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
1232
1233 @example
1234 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble( @key{M-?}
1235 bubble(double,double) bubble(int,int)
1236 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1237 @end example
1238
1239 In some cases, @value{GDBN} can tell that completing a name requires using
1240 quotes. When this happens, @value{GDBN} inserts the quote for you (while
1241 completing as much as it can) if you do not type the quote in the first
1242 place:
1243
1244 @example
1245 (@value{GDBP}) b bub @key{TAB}
1246 @exdent @value{GDBN} alters your input line to the following, and rings a bell:
1247 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1248 @end example
1249
1250 @noindent
1251 In general, @value{GDBN} can tell that a quote is needed (and inserts it) if
1252 you have not yet started typing the argument list when you ask for
1253 completion on an overloaded symbol.
1254 @end ifclear
1255
1256
1257 @node Help
1258 @section Getting help
1259 @cindex online documentation
1260 @kindex help
1261
1262 You can always ask @value{GDBN} itself for information on its commands, using the
1263 command @code{help}.
1264
1265 @table @code
1266 @item help
1267 @itemx h
1268 @kindex h
1269 You can use @code{help} (abbreviated @code{h}) with no arguments to
1270 display a short list of named classes of commands:
1271
1272 @smallexample
1273 (@value{GDBP}) help
1274 List of classes of commands:
1275
1276 running -- Running the program
1277 stack -- Examining the stack
1278 data -- Examining data
1279 breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
1280 files -- Specifying and examining files
1281 status -- Status inquiries
1282 support -- Support facilities
1283 user-defined -- User-defined commands
1284 aliases -- Aliases of other commands
1285 obscure -- Obscure features
1286
1287 Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
1288 commands in that class.
1289 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1290 documentation.
1291 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1292 (@value{GDBP})
1293 @end smallexample
1294
1295 @item help @var{class}
1296 Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
1297 list of the individual commands in that class. For example, here is the
1298 help display for the class @code{status}:
1299
1300 @smallexample
1301 (@value{GDBP}) help status
1302 Status inquiries.
1303
1304 List of commands:
1305
1306 @c Line break in "show" line falsifies real output, but needed
1307 @c to fit in smallbook page size.
1308 show -- Generic command for showing things set
1309 with "set"
1310 info -- Generic command for printing status
1311
1312 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1313 documentation.
1314 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1315 (@value{GDBP})
1316 @end smallexample
1317
1318 @item help @var{command}
1319 With a command name as @code{help} argument, @value{GDBN} displays a
1320 short paragraph on how to use that command.
1321 @end table
1322
1323 In addition to @code{help}, you can use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{info}
1324 and @code{show} to inquire about the state of your program, or the state
1325 of @value{GDBN} itself. Each command supports many topics of inquiry; this
1326 manual introduces each of them in the appropriate context. The listings
1327 under @code{info} and under @code{show} in the Index point to
1328 all the sub-commands. @xref{Index}.
1329
1330 @c @group
1331 @table @code
1332 @item info
1333 @kindex info
1334 @kindex i
1335 This command (abbreviated @code{i}) is for describing the state of your
1336 program. For example, you can list the arguments given to your program
1337 with @code{info args}, list the registers currently in use with @code{info
1338 registers}, or list the breakpoints you have set with @code{info breakpoints}.
1339 You can get a complete list of the @code{info} sub-commands with
1340 @w{@code{help info}}.
1341
1342 @kindex show
1343 @item show
1344 In contrast, @code{show} is for describing the state of @value{GDBN} itself.
1345 You can change most of the things you can @code{show}, by using the
1346 related command @code{set}; for example, you can control what number
1347 system is used for displays with @code{set radix}, or simply inquire
1348 which is currently in use with @code{show radix}.
1349
1350 @kindex info set
1351 To display all the settable parameters and their current
1352 values, you can use @code{show} with no arguments; you may also use
1353 @code{info set}. Both commands produce the same display.
1354 @c FIXME: "info set" violates the rule that "info" is for state of
1355 @c FIXME...program. Ck w/ GNU: "info set" to be called something else,
1356 @c FIXME...or change desc of rule---eg "state of prog and debugging session"?
1357 @end table
1358 @c @end group
1359
1360 Here are three miscellaneous @code{show} subcommands, all of which are
1361 exceptional in lacking corresponding @code{set} commands:
1362
1363 @table @code
1364 @kindex show version
1365 @cindex version number
1366 @item show version
1367 Show what version of @value{GDBN} is running. You should include this
1368 information in @value{GDBN} bug-reports. If multiple versions of @value{GDBN} are in
1369 use at your site, you may occasionally want to determine which version
1370 of @value{GDBN} you are running; as @value{GDBN} evolves, new commands are introduced,
1371 and old ones may wither away. The version number is also announced
1372 when you start @value{GDBN}.
1373
1374 @kindex show copying
1375 @item show copying
1376 Display information about permission for copying @value{GDBN}.
1377
1378 @kindex show warranty
1379 @item show warranty
1380 Display the GNU ``NO WARRANTY'' statement.
1381 @end table
1382
1383 @node Running
1384 @chapter Running Programs Under @value{GDBN}
1385
1386 When you run a program under @value{GDBN}, you must first generate
1387 debugging information when you compile it.
1388 @ifclear BARETARGET
1389 You may start it with its arguments, if any, in an environment of your
1390 choice. You may redirect your program's input and output, debug an
1391 already running process, or kill a child process.
1392 @end ifclear
1393
1394 @menu
1395 * Compilation:: Compiling for debugging
1396 * Starting:: Starting your program
1397 @ifclear BARETARGET
1398 * Arguments:: Your program's arguments
1399 * Environment:: Your program's environment
1400 * Working Directory:: Your program's working directory
1401 * Input/Output:: Your program's input and output
1402 * Attach:: Debugging an already-running process
1403 * Kill Process:: Killing the child process
1404 * Process Information:: Additional process information
1405 * Threads:: Debugging programs with multiple threads
1406 * Processes:: Debugging programs with multiple processes
1407 @end ifclear
1408 @end menu
1409
1410 @node Compilation
1411 @section Compiling for debugging
1412
1413 In order to debug a program effectively, you need to generate
1414 debugging information when you compile it. This debugging information
1415 is stored in the object file; it describes the data type of each
1416 variable or function and the correspondence between source line numbers
1417 and addresses in the executable code.
1418
1419 To request debugging information, specify the @samp{-g} option when you run
1420 the compiler.
1421
1422 Many C compilers are unable to handle the @samp{-g} and @samp{-O}
1423 options together. Using those compilers, you cannot generate optimized
1424 executables containing debugging information.
1425
1426 @value{NGCC}, the GNU C compiler, supports @samp{-g} with or without
1427 @samp{-O}, making it possible to debug optimized code. We recommend
1428 that you @emph{always} use @samp{-g} whenever you compile a program.
1429 You may think your program is correct, but there is no sense in pushing
1430 your luck.
1431
1432 @cindex optimized code, debugging
1433 @cindex debugging optimized code
1434 When you debug a program compiled with @samp{-g -O}, remember that the
1435 optimizer is rearranging your code; the debugger shows you what is
1436 really there. Do not be too surprised when the execution path does not
1437 exactly match your source file! An extreme example: if you define a
1438 variable, but never use it, @value{GDBN} never sees that
1439 variable---because the compiler optimizes it out of existence.
1440
1441 Some things do not work as well with @samp{-g -O} as with just
1442 @samp{-g}, particularly on machines with instruction scheduling. If in
1443 doubt, recompile with @samp{-g} alone, and if this fixes the problem,
1444 please report it as a bug (including a test case!).
1445
1446 Older versions of the GNU C compiler permitted a variant option
1447 @w{@samp{-gg}} for debugging information. @value{GDBN} no longer supports this
1448 format; if your GNU C compiler has this option, do not use it.
1449
1450 @need 2000
1451 @node Starting
1452 @section Starting your program
1453 @cindex starting
1454 @cindex running
1455
1456 @table @code
1457 @item run
1458 @itemx r
1459 @kindex run
1460 Use the @code{run} command to start your program under @value{GDBN}. You must
1461 first specify the program name
1462 @ifset VXWORKS
1463 (except on VxWorks)
1464 @end ifset
1465 with an argument to @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation, ,Getting In and
1466 Out of @value{GDBN}}), or by using the @code{file} or @code{exec-file}
1467 command (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
1468
1469 @end table
1470
1471 @ifclear BARETARGET
1472 If you are running your program in an execution environment that
1473 supports processes, @code{run} creates an inferior process and makes
1474 that process run your program. (In environments without processes,
1475 @code{run} jumps to the start of your program.)
1476
1477 The execution of a program is affected by certain information it
1478 receives from its superior. @value{GDBN} provides ways to specify this
1479 information, which you must do @emph{before} starting your program. (You
1480 can change it after starting your program, but such changes only affect
1481 your program the next time you start it.) This information may be
1482 divided into four categories:
1483
1484 @table @asis
1485 @item The @emph{arguments.}
1486 Specify the arguments to give your program as the arguments of the
1487 @code{run} command. If a shell is available on your target, the shell
1488 is used to pass the arguments, so that you may use normal conventions
1489 (such as wildcard expansion or variable substitution) in describing
1490 the arguments. In Unix systems, you can control which shell is used
1491 with the @code{SHELL} environment variable. @xref{Arguments, ,Your
1492 program's arguments}.
1493
1494 @item The @emph{environment.}
1495 Your program normally inherits its environment from @value{GDBN}, but you can
1496 use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{set environment} and @code{unset
1497 environment} to change parts of the environment that affect
1498 your program. @xref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}.
1499
1500 @item The @emph{working directory.}
1501 Your program inherits its working directory from @value{GDBN}. You can set
1502 the @value{GDBN} working directory with the @code{cd} command in @value{GDBN}.
1503 @xref{Working Directory, ,Your program's working directory}.
1504
1505 @item The @emph{standard input and output.}
1506 Your program normally uses the same device for standard input and
1507 standard output as @value{GDBN} is using. You can redirect input and output
1508 in the @code{run} command line, or you can use the @code{tty} command to
1509 set a different device for your program.
1510 @xref{Input/Output, ,Your program's input and output}.
1511
1512 @cindex pipes
1513 @emph{Warning:} While input and output redirection work, you cannot use
1514 pipes to pass the output of the program you are debugging to another
1515 program; if you attempt this, @value{GDBN} is likely to wind up debugging the
1516 wrong program.
1517 @end table
1518 @end ifclear
1519
1520 When you issue the @code{run} command, your program begins to execute
1521 immediately. @xref{Stopping, ,Stopping and continuing}, for discussion
1522 of how to arrange for your program to stop. Once your program has
1523 stopped, you may call functions in your program, using the @code{print}
1524 or @code{call} commands. @xref{Data, ,Examining Data}.
1525
1526 If the modification time of your symbol file has changed since the last
1527 time @value{GDBN} read its symbols, @value{GDBN} discards its symbol
1528 table, and reads it again. When it does this, @value{GDBN} tries to retain
1529 your current breakpoints.
1530
1531 @ifclear BARETARGET
1532 @node Arguments
1533 @section Your program's arguments
1534
1535 @cindex arguments (to your program)
1536 The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
1537 @code{run} command. They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard
1538 characters and performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program.
1539 Your @code{SHELL} environment variable (if it exists) specifies what
1540 shell @value{GDBN} uses. If you do not define @code{SHELL},
1541 @value{GDBN} uses @code{/bin/sh}.
1542
1543 @code{run} with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
1544 @code{run}, or those set by the @code{set args} command.
1545
1546 @kindex set args
1547 @table @code
1548 @item set args
1549 Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is run. If
1550 @code{set args} has no arguments, @code{run} executes your program
1551 with no arguments. Once you have run your program with arguments,
1552 using @code{set args} before the next @code{run} is the only way to run
1553 it again without arguments.
1554
1555 @item show args
1556 @kindex show args
1557 Show the arguments to give your program when it is started.
1558 @end table
1559
1560 @node Environment
1561 @section Your program's environment
1562
1563 @cindex environment (of your program)
1564 The @dfn{environment} consists of a set of environment variables and
1565 their values. Environment variables conventionally record such things as
1566 your user name, your home directory, your terminal type, and your search
1567 path for programs to run. Usually you set up environment variables with
1568 the shell and they are inherited by all the other programs you run. When
1569 debugging, it can be useful to try running your program with a modified
1570 environment without having to start @value{GDBN} over again.
1571
1572 @table @code
1573 @item path @var{directory}
1574 @kindex path
1575 Add @var{directory} to the front of the @code{PATH} environment variable
1576 (the search path for executables), for both @value{GDBN} and your program.
1577 You may specify several directory names, separated by @samp{:} or
1578 whitespace. If @var{directory} is already in the path, it is moved to
1579 the front, so it is searched sooner.
1580
1581 You can use the string @samp{$cwd} to refer to whatever is the current
1582 working directory at the time @value{GDBN} searches the path. If you
1583 use @samp{.} instead, it refers to the directory where you executed the
1584 @code{path} command. @value{GDBN} replaces @samp{.} in the
1585 @var{directory} argument (with the current path) before adding
1586 @var{directory} to the search path.
1587 @c 'path' is explicitly nonrepeatable, but RMS points out it is silly to
1588 @c document that, since repeating it would be a no-op.
1589
1590 @item show paths
1591 @kindex show paths
1592 Display the list of search paths for executables (the @code{PATH}
1593 environment variable).
1594
1595 @item show environment @r{[}@var{varname}@r{]}
1596 @kindex show environment
1597 Print the value of environment variable @var{varname} to be given to
1598 your program when it starts. If you do not supply @var{varname},
1599 print the names and values of all environment variables to be given to
1600 your program. You can abbreviate @code{environment} as @code{env}.
1601
1602 @item set environment @var{varname} @r{[}=@r{]} @var{value}
1603 @kindex set environment
1604 Set environment variable @var{varname} to @var{value}. The value
1605 changes for your program only, not for @value{GDBN} itself. @var{value} may
1606 be any string; the values of environment variables are just strings, and
1607 any interpretation is supplied by your program itself. The @var{value}
1608 parameter is optional; if it is eliminated, the variable is set to a
1609 null value.
1610 @c "any string" here does not include leading, trailing
1611 @c blanks. Gnu asks: does anyone care?
1612
1613 For example, this command:
1614
1615 @example
1616 set env USER = foo
1617 @end example
1618
1619 @noindent
1620 tells a Unix program, when subsequently run, that its user is named
1621 @samp{foo}. (The spaces around @samp{=} are used for clarity here; they
1622 are not actually required.)
1623
1624 @item unset environment @var{varname}
1625 @kindex unset environment
1626 Remove variable @var{varname} from the environment to be passed to your
1627 program. This is different from @samp{set env @var{varname} =};
1628 @code{unset environment} removes the variable from the environment,
1629 rather than assigning it an empty value.
1630 @end table
1631
1632 @emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} runs your program using the shell indicated
1633 by your @code{SHELL} environment variable if it exists (or
1634 @code{/bin/sh} if not). If your @code{SHELL} variable names a shell
1635 that runs an initialization file---such as @file{.cshrc} for C-shell, or
1636 @file{.bashrc} for BASH---any variables you set in that file affect
1637 your program. You may wish to move setting of environment variables to
1638 files that are only run when you sign on, such as @file{.login} or
1639 @file{.profile}.
1640
1641 @node Working Directory
1642 @section Your program's working directory
1643
1644 @cindex working directory (of your program)
1645 Each time you start your program with @code{run}, it inherits its
1646 working directory from the current working directory of @value{GDBN}.
1647 The @value{GDBN} working directory is initially whatever it inherited
1648 from its parent process (typically the shell), but you can specify a new
1649 working directory in @value{GDBN} with the @code{cd} command.
1650
1651 The @value{GDBN} working directory also serves as a default for the commands
1652 that specify files for @value{GDBN} to operate on. @xref{Files, ,Commands to
1653 specify files}.
1654
1655 @table @code
1656 @item cd @var{directory}
1657 @kindex cd
1658 Set the @value{GDBN} working directory to @var{directory}.
1659
1660 @item pwd
1661 @kindex pwd
1662 Print the @value{GDBN} working directory.
1663 @end table
1664
1665 @node Input/Output
1666 @section Your program's input and output
1667
1668 @cindex redirection
1669 @cindex i/o
1670 @cindex terminal
1671 By default, the program you run under @value{GDBN} does input and output to
1672 the same terminal that @value{GDBN} uses. @value{GDBN} switches the terminal to
1673 its own terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal
1674 modes your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
1675 running your program.
1676
1677 @table @code
1678 @item info terminal
1679 @kindex info terminal
1680 Displays information recorded by @value{GDBN} about the terminal modes your
1681 program is using.
1682 @end table
1683
1684 You can redirect your program's input and/or output using shell
1685 redirection with the @code{run} command. For example,
1686
1687 @example
1688 run > outfile
1689 @end example
1690
1691 @noindent
1692 starts your program, diverting its output to the file @file{outfile}.
1693
1694 @kindex tty
1695 @cindex controlling terminal
1696 Another way to specify where your program should do input and output is
1697 with the @code{tty} command. This command accepts a file name as
1698 argument, and causes this file to be the default for future @code{run}
1699 commands. It also resets the controlling terminal for the child
1700 process, for future @code{run} commands. For example,
1701
1702 @example
1703 tty /dev/ttyb
1704 @end example
1705
1706 @noindent
1707 directs that processes started with subsequent @code{run} commands
1708 default to do input and output on the terminal @file{/dev/ttyb} and have
1709 that as their controlling terminal.
1710
1711 An explicit redirection in @code{run} overrides the @code{tty} command's
1712 effect on the input/output device, but not its effect on the controlling
1713 terminal.
1714
1715 When you use the @code{tty} command or redirect input in the @code{run}
1716 command, only the input @emph{for your program} is affected. The input
1717 for @value{GDBN} still comes from your terminal.
1718
1719 @node Attach
1720 @section Debugging an already-running process
1721 @kindex attach
1722 @cindex attach
1723
1724 @table @code
1725 @item attach @var{process-id}
1726 This command attaches to a running process---one that was started
1727 outside @value{GDBN}. (@code{info files} shows your active
1728 targets.) The command takes as argument a process ID. The usual way to
1729 find out the process-id of a Unix process is with the @code{ps} utility,
1730 or with the @samp{jobs -l} shell command.
1731
1732 @code{attach} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} a second time after
1733 executing the command.
1734 @end table
1735
1736 To use @code{attach}, your program must be running in an environment
1737 which supports processes; for example, @code{attach} does not work for
1738 programs on bare-board targets that lack an operating system. You must
1739 also have permission to send the process a signal.
1740
1741 When using @code{attach}, you should first use the @code{file} command
1742 to specify the program running in the process and load its symbol table.
1743 @xref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}.
1744
1745 The first thing @value{GDBN} does after arranging to debug the specified
1746 process is to stop it. You can examine and modify an attached process
1747 with all the @value{GDBN} commands that are ordinarily available when you start
1748 processes with @code{run}. You can insert breakpoints; you can step and
1749 continue; you can modify storage. If you would rather the process
1750 continue running, you may use the @code{continue} command after
1751 attaching @value{GDBN} to the process.
1752
1753 @table @code
1754 @item detach
1755 @kindex detach
1756 When you have finished debugging the attached process, you can use the
1757 @code{detach} command to release it from @value{GDBN} control. Detaching
1758 the process continues its execution. After the @code{detach} command,
1759 that process and @value{GDBN} become completely independent once more, and you
1760 are ready to @code{attach} another process or start one with @code{run}.
1761 @code{detach} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
1762 executing the command.
1763 @end table
1764
1765 If you exit @value{GDBN} or use the @code{run} command while you have an
1766 attached process, you kill that process. By default, @value{GDBN} asks
1767 for confirmation if you try to do either of these things; you can
1768 control whether or not you need to confirm by using the @code{set
1769 confirm} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
1770 messages}).
1771
1772 @node Kill Process
1773 @c @group
1774 @section Killing the child process
1775
1776 @table @code
1777 @item kill
1778 @kindex kill
1779 Kill the child process in which your program is running under @value{GDBN}.
1780 @end table
1781
1782 This command is useful if you wish to debug a core dump instead of a
1783 running process. @value{GDBN} ignores any core dump file while your program
1784 is running.
1785 @c @end group
1786
1787 On some operating systems, a program cannot be executed outside @value{GDBN}
1788 while you have breakpoints set on it inside @value{GDBN}. You can use the
1789 @code{kill} command in this situation to permit running your program
1790 outside the debugger.
1791
1792 The @code{kill} command is also useful if you wish to recompile and
1793 relink your program, since on many systems it is impossible to modify an
1794 executable file while it is running in a process. In this case, when you
1795 next type @code{run}, @value{GDBN} notices that the file has changed, and
1796 reads the symbol table again (while trying to preserve your current
1797 breakpoint settings).
1798
1799 @node Process Information
1800 @section Additional process information
1801
1802 @kindex /proc
1803 @cindex process image
1804 Some operating systems provide a facility called @samp{/proc} that can
1805 be used to examine the image of a running process using file-system
1806 subroutines. If @value{GDBN} is configured for an operating system with this
1807 facility, the command @code{info proc} is available to report on several
1808 kinds of information about the process running your program.
1809
1810 @table @code
1811 @item info proc
1812 @kindex info proc
1813 Summarize available information about the process.
1814
1815 @item info proc mappings
1816 @kindex info proc mappings
1817 Report on the address ranges accessible in the program, with information
1818 on whether your program may read, write, or execute each range.
1819
1820 @item info proc times
1821 @kindex info proc times
1822 Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
1823 its children.
1824
1825 @item info proc id
1826 @kindex info proc id
1827 Report on the process IDs related to your program: its own process ID,
1828 the ID of its parent, the process group ID, and the session ID.
1829
1830 @item info proc status
1831 @kindex info proc status
1832 General information on the state of the process. If the process is
1833 stopped, this report includes the reason for stopping, and any signal
1834 received.
1835
1836 @item info proc all
1837 Show all the above information about the process.
1838 @end table
1839
1840 @node Threads
1841 @section Debugging programs with multiple threads
1842
1843 @cindex threads of execution
1844 @cindex multiple threads
1845 @cindex switching threads
1846 In some operating systems, a single program may have more than one
1847 @dfn{thread} of execution. The precise semantics of threads differ from
1848 one operating system to another, but in general the threads of a single
1849 program are akin to multiple processes---except that they share one
1850 address space (that is, they can all examine and modify the same
1851 variables). On the other hand, each thread has its own registers and
1852 execution stack, and perhaps private memory.
1853
1854 @value{GDBN} provides these facilities for debugging multi-thread
1855 programs:
1856
1857 @itemize @bullet
1858 @item automatic notification of new threads
1859 @item @samp{thread @var{threadno}}, a command to switch among threads
1860 @item @samp{info threads}, a command to inquire about existing threads
1861 @item thread-specific breakpoints
1862 @end itemize
1863
1864 @quotation
1865 @emph{Warning:} These facilities are not yet available on every
1866 @value{GDBN} configuration where the operating system supports threads.
1867 If your @value{GDBN} does not support threads, these commands have no
1868 effect. For example, a system without thread support shows no output
1869 from @samp{info threads}, and always rejects the @code{thread} command,
1870 like this:
1871
1872 @smallexample
1873 (@value{GDBP}) info threads
1874 (@value{GDBP}) thread 1
1875 Thread ID 1 not known. Use the "info threads" command to
1876 see the IDs of currently known threads.
1877 @end smallexample
1878 @c FIXME to implementors: how hard would it be to say "sorry, this GDB
1879 @c doesn't support threads"?
1880 @end quotation
1881
1882 @cindex focus of debugging
1883 @cindex current thread
1884 The @value{GDBN} thread debugging facility allows you to observe all
1885 threads while your program runs---but whenever @value{GDBN} takes
1886 control, one thread in particular is always the focus of debugging.
1887 This thread is called the @dfn{current thread}. Debugging commands show
1888 program information from the perspective of the current thread.
1889
1890 @kindex New @var{systag}
1891 @cindex thread identifier (system)
1892 @c FIXME-implementors!! It would be more helpful if the [New...] message
1893 @c included GDB's numeric thread handle, so you could just go to that
1894 @c thread without first checking `info threads'.
1895 Whenever @value{GDBN} detects a new thread in your program, it displays
1896 the target system's identification for the thread with a message in the
1897 form @samp{[New @var{systag}]}. @var{systag} is a thread identifier
1898 whose form varies depending on the particular system. For example, on
1899 LynxOS, you might see
1900
1901 @example
1902 [New process 35 thread 27]
1903 @end example
1904
1905 @noindent
1906 when @value{GDBN} notices a new thread. In contrast, on an SGI system,
1907 the @var{systag} is simply something like @samp{process 368}, with no
1908 further qualifier.
1909
1910 @c FIXME!! (1) Does the [New...] message appear even for the very first
1911 @c thread of a program, or does it only appear for the
1912 @c second---i.e., when it becomes obvious we have a multithread
1913 @c program?
1914 @c (2) *Is* there necessarily a first thread always? Or do some
1915 @c multithread systems permit starting a program with multiple
1916 @c threads ab initio?
1917
1918 @cindex thread number
1919 @cindex thread identifier (GDB)
1920 For debugging purposes, @value{GDBN} associates its own thread
1921 number---always a single integer---with each thread in your program.
1922
1923 @table @code
1924 @item info threads
1925 @kindex info threads
1926 Display a summary of all threads currently in your
1927 program. @value{GDBN} displays for each thread (in this order):
1928
1929 @enumerate
1930 @item the thread number assigned by @value{GDBN}
1931
1932 @item the target system's thread identifier (@var{systag})
1933
1934 @item the current stack frame summary for that thread
1935 @end enumerate
1936
1937 @noindent
1938 An asterisk @samp{*} to the left of the @value{GDBN} thread number
1939 indicates the current thread.
1940
1941 For example,
1942 @end table
1943 @c end table here to get a little more width for example
1944
1945 @smallexample
1946 (@value{GDBP}) info threads
1947 3 process 35 thread 27 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
1948 2 process 35 thread 23 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
1949 * 1 process 35 thread 13 main (argc=1, argv=0x7ffffff8)
1950 at threadtest.c:68
1951 @end smallexample
1952
1953 @table @code
1954 @item thread @var{threadno}
1955 @kindex thread @var{threadno}
1956 Make thread number @var{threadno} the current thread. The command
1957 argument @var{threadno} is the internal @value{GDBN} thread number, as
1958 shown in the first field of the @samp{info threads} display.
1959 @value{GDBN} responds by displaying the system identifier of the thread
1960 you selected, and its current stack frame summary:
1961
1962 @smallexample
1963 @c FIXME!! This example made up; find a GDB w/threads and get real one
1964 (@value{GDBP}) thread 2
1965 [Switching to process 35 thread 23]
1966 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
1967 @end smallexample
1968
1969 @noindent
1970 As with the @samp{[New @dots{}]} message, the form of the text after
1971 @samp{Switching to} depends on your system's conventions for identifying
1972 threads.
1973 @end table
1974
1975 @cindex automatic thread selection
1976 @cindex switching threads automatically
1977 @cindex threads, automatic switching
1978 Whenever @value{GDBN} stops your program, due to a breakpoint or a
1979 signal, it automatically selects the thread where that breakpoint or
1980 signal happened. @value{GDBN} alerts you to the context switch with a
1981 message of the form @samp{[Switching to @var{systag}]} to identify the
1982 thread.
1983
1984 @xref{Thread Stops,,Stopping and starting multi-thread programs}, for
1985 more information about how @value{GDBN} behaves when you stop and start
1986 programs with multiple threads.
1987
1988 @xref{Set Watchpoints,,Setting watchpoints}, for information about
1989 watchpoints in programs with multiple threads.
1990 @end ifclear
1991
1992 @node Processes
1993 @section Debugging programs with multiple processes
1994
1995 @cindex fork, debugging programs which call
1996 @cindex multiple processes
1997 @cindex processes, multiple
1998 @value{GDBN} has no special support for debugging programs which create
1999 additional processes using the @code{fork} function. When a program
2000 forks, @value{GDBN} will continue to debug the parent process and the
2001 child process will run unimpeded. If you have set a breakpoint in any
2002 code which the child then executes, the child will get a @code{SIGTRAP}
2003 signal which (unless it catches the signal) will cause it to terminate.
2004
2005 However, if you want to debug the child process there is a workaround
2006 which isn't too painful. Put a call to @code{sleep} in the code which
2007 the child process executes after the fork. It may be useful to sleep
2008 only if a certain environment variable is set, or a certain file exists,
2009 so that the delay need not occur when you don't want to run @value{GDBN}
2010 on the child. While the child is sleeping, use the @code{ps} program to
2011 get its process ID. Then tell @value{GDBN} (a new invocation of
2012 @value{GDBN} if you are also debugging the parent process) to attach to
2013 the child process (see @ref{Attach}). From that point on you can debug
2014 the child process just like any other process which you attached to.
2015
2016 @node Stopping
2017 @chapter Stopping and Continuing
2018
2019 The principal purposes of using a debugger are so that you can stop your
2020 program before it terminates; or so that, if your program runs into
2021 trouble, you can investigate and find out why.
2022
2023 Inside @value{GDBN}, your program may stop for any of several reasons, such
2024 as
2025 @ifclear BARETARGET
2026 a signal,
2027 @end ifclear
2028 a breakpoint, or reaching a new line after a @value{GDBN}
2029 command such as @code{step}. You may then examine and change
2030 variables, set new breakpoints or remove old ones, and then continue
2031 execution. Usually, the messages shown by @value{GDBN} provide ample
2032 explanation of the status of your program---but you can also explicitly
2033 request this information at any time.
2034
2035 @table @code
2036 @item info program
2037 @kindex info program
2038 Display information about the status of your program: whether it is
2039 running or not,
2040 @ifclear BARETARGET
2041 what process it is,
2042 @end ifclear
2043 and why it stopped.
2044 @end table
2045
2046 @menu
2047 @ifclear CONLY
2048 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
2049 @end ifclear
2050 @ifset CONLY
2051 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints and watchpoints
2052 @end ifset
2053 @c Remnant makeinfo bug requires blank line after *successful* end-if in menu:
2054
2055 * Continuing and Stepping:: Resuming execution
2056 @ifset POSIX
2057 * Signals:: Signals
2058 @end ifset
2059 @ifclear BARETARGET
2060 * Thread Stops:: Stopping and starting multi-thread programs
2061 @end ifclear
2062 @end menu
2063
2064 @c makeinfo node-defaulting requires adjacency of @node and sectioning cmds
2065 @c ...hence distribute @node Breakpoints over two possible @if expansions.
2066 @c
2067 @ifclear CONLY
2068 @node Breakpoints
2069 @section Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
2070 @end ifclear
2071 @ifset CONLY
2072 @node Breakpoints
2073 @section Breakpoints and watchpoints
2074 @end ifset
2075
2076 @cindex breakpoints
2077 A @dfn{breakpoint} makes your program stop whenever a certain point in
2078 the program is reached. For each breakpoint, you can add
2079 conditions to control in finer detail whether your program stops.
2080 You can set breakpoints with the @code{break} command and its variants
2081 (@pxref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}), to specify the place where
2082 your program should stop by line number, function name or exact address
2083 in the program.
2084 @ifclear CONLY
2085 In languages with exception handling (such as GNU C++), you can also set
2086 breakpoints where an exception is raised (@pxref{Exception Handling,,
2087 Breakpoints and exceptions}).
2088 @end ifclear
2089
2090 @cindex watchpoints
2091 @cindex memory tracing
2092 @cindex breakpoint on memory address
2093 @cindex breakpoint on variable modification
2094 A @dfn{watchpoint} is a special breakpoint that stops your program
2095 when the value of an expression changes. You must use a different
2096 command to set watchpoints (@pxref{Set Watchpoints, ,Setting
2097 watchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a watchpoint like
2098 any other breakpoint: you enable, disable, and delete both breakpoints
2099 and watchpoints using the same commands.
2100
2101 You can arrange to have values from your program displayed automatically
2102 whenever @value{GDBN} stops at a breakpoint. @xref{Auto Display,,
2103 Automatic display}.
2104
2105 @cindex breakpoint numbers
2106 @cindex numbers for breakpoints
2107 @value{GDBN} assigns a number to each breakpoint or watchpoint when you
2108 create it; these numbers are successive integers starting with one. In
2109 many of the commands for controlling various features of breakpoints you
2110 use the breakpoint number to say which breakpoint you want to change.
2111 Each breakpoint may be @dfn{enabled} or @dfn{disabled}; if disabled, it has
2112 no effect on your program until you enable it again.
2113
2114 @menu
2115 * Set Breaks:: Setting breakpoints
2116 * Set Watchpoints:: Setting watchpoints
2117 @ifclear CONLY
2118 * Exception Handling:: Breakpoints and exceptions
2119 @end ifclear
2120
2121 * Delete Breaks:: Deleting breakpoints
2122 * Disabling:: Disabling breakpoints
2123 * Conditions:: Break conditions
2124 * Break Commands:: Breakpoint command lists
2125 @ifclear CONLY
2126 * Breakpoint Menus:: Breakpoint menus
2127 @end ifclear
2128 @ifclear BARETARGET
2129 * Error in Breakpoints:: ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2130 @end ifclear
2131 @end menu
2132
2133 @node Set Breaks
2134 @subsection Setting breakpoints
2135
2136 @c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
2137 @c consider in particular declaration with/without initialization.
2138 @c
2139 @c FIXME 2 is there stuff on this already? break at fun start, already init?
2140
2141 @kindex break
2142 @kindex b
2143 @kindex $bpnum
2144 @cindex latest breakpoint
2145 Breakpoints are set with the @code{break} command (abbreviated
2146 @code{b}). The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
2147 number of the beakpoint you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
2148 Vars,, Convenience variables}, for a discussion of what you can do with
2149 convenience variables.
2150
2151 You have several ways to say where the breakpoint should go.
2152
2153 @table @code
2154 @item break @var{function}
2155 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}.
2156 @ifclear CONLY
2157 When using source languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as
2158 C++, @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
2159 @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}, for a discussion of that situation.
2160 @end ifclear
2161
2162 @item break +@var{offset}
2163 @itemx break -@var{offset}
2164 Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the position
2165 at which execution stopped in the currently selected frame.
2166
2167 @item break @var{linenum}
2168 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in the current source file.
2169 That file is the last file whose source text was printed. This
2170 breakpoint stops your program just before it executes any of the
2171 code on that line.
2172
2173 @item break @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2174 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in source file @var{filename}.
2175
2176 @item break @var{filename}:@var{function}
2177 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function} found in file
2178 @var{filename}. Specifying a file name as well as a function name is
2179 superfluous except when multiple files contain similarly named
2180 functions.
2181
2182 @item break *@var{address}
2183 Set a breakpoint at address @var{address}. You can use this to set
2184 breakpoints in parts of your program which do not have debugging
2185 information or source files.
2186
2187 @item break
2188 When called without any arguments, @code{break} sets a breakpoint at
2189 the next instruction to be executed in the selected stack frame
2190 (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the Stack}). In any selected frame but the
2191 innermost, this makes your program stop as soon as control
2192 returns to that frame. This is similar to the effect of a
2193 @code{finish} command in the frame inside the selected frame---except
2194 that @code{finish} does not leave an active breakpoint. If you use
2195 @code{break} without an argument in the innermost frame, @value{GDBN} stops
2196 the next time it reaches the current location; this may be useful
2197 inside loops.
2198
2199 @value{GDBN} normally ignores breakpoints when it resumes execution, until at
2200 least one instruction has been executed. If it did not do this, you
2201 would be unable to proceed past a breakpoint without first disabling the
2202 breakpoint. This rule applies whether or not the breakpoint already
2203 existed when your program stopped.
2204
2205 @item break @dots{} if @var{cond}
2206 Set a breakpoint with condition @var{cond}; evaluate the expression
2207 @var{cond} each time the breakpoint is reached, and stop only if the
2208 value is nonzero---that is, if @var{cond} evaluates as true.
2209 @samp{@dots{}} stands for one of the possible arguments described
2210 above (or no argument) specifying where to break. @xref{Conditions,
2211 ,Break conditions}, for more information on breakpoint conditions.
2212
2213 @item tbreak @var{args}
2214 @kindex tbreak
2215 Set a breakpoint enabled only for one stop. @var{args} are the
2216 same as for the @code{break} command, and the breakpoint is set in the same
2217 way, but the breakpoint is automatically deleted after the first time your
2218 program stops there. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling breakpoints}.
2219
2220 @item rbreak @var{regex}
2221 @kindex rbreak
2222 @cindex regular expression
2223 @c FIXME what kind of regexp?
2224 Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
2225 @var{regex}. This command
2226 sets an unconditional breakpoint on all matches, printing a list of all
2227 breakpoints it set. Once these breakpoints are set, they are treated
2228 just like the breakpoints set with the @code{break} command. You can
2229 delete them, disable them, or make them conditional the same way as any
2230 other breakpoint.
2231
2232 @ifclear CONLY
2233 When debugging C++ programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
2234 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
2235 classes.
2236 @end ifclear
2237
2238 @kindex info breakpoints
2239 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info breakpoints}
2240 @item info breakpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2241 @itemx info break @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2242 @itemx info watchpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2243 Print a table of all breakpoints and watchpoints set and not
2244 deleted, with the following columns for each breakpoint:
2245
2246 @table @emph
2247 @item Breakpoint Numbers
2248 @item Type
2249 Breakpoint or watchpoint.
2250 @item Disposition
2251 Whether the breakpoint is marked to be disabled or deleted when hit.
2252 @item Enabled or Disabled
2253 Enabled breakpoints are marked with @samp{y}. @samp{n} marks breakpoints
2254 that are not enabled.
2255 @item Address
2256 Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address
2257 @item What
2258 Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a file and
2259 line number.
2260 @end table
2261
2262 @noindent
2263 If a breakpoint is conditional, @code{info break} shows the condition on
2264 the line following the affected breakpoint; breakpoint commands, if any,
2265 are listed after that.
2266
2267 @noindent
2268 @code{info break} with a breakpoint
2269 number @var{n} as argument lists only that breakpoint. The
2270 convenience variable @code{$_} and the default examining-address for
2271 the @code{x} command are set to the address of the last breakpoint
2272 listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}).
2273 @end table
2274
2275 @value{GDBN} allows you to set any number of breakpoints at the same place in
2276 your program. There is nothing silly or meaningless about this. When
2277 the breakpoints are conditional, this is even useful
2278 (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2279
2280 @cindex negative breakpoint numbers
2281 @cindex internal @value{GDBN} breakpoints
2282 @value{GDBN} itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for special
2283 purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C programs).
2284 These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers, starting with
2285 @code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
2286
2287 You can see these breakpoints with the @value{GDBN} maintenance command
2288 @samp{maint info breakpoints}.
2289
2290 @table @code
2291 @kindex maint info breakpoints
2292 @item maint info breakpoints
2293 Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
2294 breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those @value{GDBN} is using for
2295 internal purposes. Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
2296 breakpoint numbers. The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
2297 is shown:
2298
2299 @table @code
2300 @item breakpoint
2301 Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
2302
2303 @item watchpoint
2304 Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
2305
2306 @item longjmp
2307 Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
2308 @code{longjmp} calls.
2309
2310 @item longjmp resume
2311 Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
2312
2313 @item until
2314 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{until} command.
2315
2316 @item finish
2317 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{finish} command.
2318 @end table
2319
2320 @end table
2321
2322
2323 @node Set Watchpoints
2324 @subsection Setting watchpoints
2325 @cindex setting watchpoints
2326
2327 You can use a watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an
2328 expression changes, without having to predict a particular place
2329 where this may happen.
2330
2331 Watchpoints currently execute two orders of magnitude more slowly than
2332 other breakpoints, but this can be well worth it to catch errors where
2333 you have no clue what part of your program is the culprit.
2334
2335 Some processors provide special hardware to support watchpoint
2336 evaluation; @value{GDBN} will use such hardware if it is available,
2337 and if the support code has been added for that configuration.
2338
2339 @table @code
2340 @kindex watch
2341 @item watch @var{expr}
2342 Set a watchpoint for an expression.
2343
2344 @kindex info watchpoints
2345 @item info watchpoints
2346 This command prints a list of watchpoints and breakpoints; it is the
2347 same as @code{info break}.
2348 @end table
2349
2350 @ifclear BARETARGET
2351 @quotation
2352 @cindex watchpoints and threads
2353 @cindex threads and watchpoints
2354 @emph{Warning:} in multi-thread programs, watchpoints have only limited
2355 usefulness. With the current watchpoint implementation, @value{GDBN}
2356 can only watch the value of an expression @emph{in a single thread}. If
2357 you are confident that the expression can only change due to the current
2358 thread's activity (and if you are also confident that no other thread
2359 can become current), then you can use watchpoints as usual. However,
2360 @value{GDBN} may not notice when a non-current thread's activity changes
2361 the expression.
2362 @end quotation
2363 @end ifclear
2364
2365 @ifclear CONLY
2366 @node Exception Handling
2367 @subsection Breakpoints and exceptions
2368 @cindex exception handlers
2369
2370 Some languages, such as GNU C++, implement exception handling. You can
2371 use @value{GDBN} to examine what caused your program to raise an exception,
2372 and to list the exceptions your program is prepared to handle at a
2373 given point in time.
2374
2375 @table @code
2376 @item catch @var{exceptions}
2377 @kindex catch
2378 You can set breakpoints at active exception handlers by using the
2379 @code{catch} command. @var{exceptions} is a list of names of exceptions
2380 to catch.
2381 @end table
2382
2383 You can use @code{info catch} to list active exception handlers.
2384 @xref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}.
2385
2386 There are currently some limitations to exception handling in @value{GDBN}:
2387
2388 @itemize @bullet
2389 @item
2390 If you call a function interactively, @value{GDBN} normally returns
2391 control to you when the function has finished executing. If the call
2392 raises an exception, however, the call may bypass the mechanism that
2393 returns control to you and cause your program to simply continue
2394 running until it hits a breakpoint, catches a signal that @value{GDBN} is
2395 listening for, or exits.
2396
2397 @item
2398 You cannot raise an exception interactively.
2399
2400 @item
2401 You cannot install an exception handler interactively.
2402 @end itemize
2403
2404 @cindex raise exceptions
2405 Sometimes @code{catch} is not the best way to debug exception handling:
2406 if you need to know exactly where an exception is raised, it is better to
2407 stop @emph{before} the exception handler is called, since that way you
2408 can see the stack before any unwinding takes place. If you set a
2409 breakpoint in an exception handler instead, it may not be easy to find
2410 out where the exception was raised.
2411
2412 To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
2413 knowledge of the implementation. In the case of GNU C++, exceptions are
2414 raised by calling a library function named @code{__raise_exception}
2415 which has the following ANSI C interface:
2416
2417 @example
2418 /* @var{addr} is where the exception identifier is stored.
2419 ID is the exception identifier. */
2420 void __raise_exception (void **@var{addr}, void *@var{id});
2421 @end example
2422
2423 @noindent
2424 To make the debugger catch all exceptions before any stack
2425 unwinding takes place, set a breakpoint on @code{__raise_exception}
2426 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions}).
2427
2428 With a conditional breakpoint (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions})
2429 that depends on the value of @var{id}, you can stop your program when
2430 a specific exception is raised. You can use multiple conditional
2431 breakpoints to stop your program when any of a number of exceptions are
2432 raised.
2433 @end ifclear
2434
2435 @node Delete Breaks
2436 @subsection Deleting breakpoints
2437
2438 @cindex clearing breakpoints, watchpoints
2439 @cindex deleting breakpoints, watchpoints
2440 It is often necessary to eliminate a breakpoint or watchpoint once it
2441 has done its job and you no longer want your program to stop there. This
2442 is called @dfn{deleting} the breakpoint. A breakpoint that has been
2443 deleted no longer exists; it is forgotten.
2444
2445 With the @code{clear} command you can delete breakpoints according to
2446 where they are in your program. With the @code{delete} command you can
2447 delete individual breakpoints or watchpoints by specifying their
2448 breakpoint numbers.
2449
2450 It is not necessary to delete a breakpoint to proceed past it. @value{GDBN}
2451 automatically ignores breakpoints on the first instruction to be executed
2452 when you continue execution without changing the execution address.
2453
2454 @table @code
2455 @item clear
2456 @kindex clear
2457 Delete any breakpoints at the next instruction to be executed in the
2458 selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). When
2459 the innermost frame is selected, this is a good way to delete a
2460 breakpoint where your program just stopped.
2461
2462 @item clear @var{function}
2463 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{function}
2464 Delete any breakpoints set at entry to the function @var{function}.
2465
2466 @item clear @var{linenum}
2467 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2468 Delete any breakpoints set at or within the code of the specified line.
2469
2470 @item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2471 @cindex delete breakpoints
2472 @kindex delete
2473 @kindex d
2474 Delete the breakpoints or watchpoints of the numbers specified as
2475 arguments. If no argument is specified, delete all breakpoints (@value{GDBN}
2476 asks confirmation, unless you have @code{set confirm off}). You
2477 can abbreviate this command as @code{d}.
2478 @end table
2479
2480 @node Disabling
2481 @subsection Disabling breakpoints
2482
2483 @cindex disabled breakpoints
2484 @cindex enabled breakpoints
2485 Rather than deleting a breakpoint or watchpoint, you might prefer to
2486 @dfn{disable} it. This makes the breakpoint inoperative as if it had
2487 been deleted, but remembers the information on the breakpoint so that
2488 you can @dfn{enable} it again later.
2489
2490 You disable and enable breakpoints and watchpoints with the
2491 @code{enable} and @code{disable} commands, optionally specifying one or
2492 more breakpoint numbers as arguments. Use @code{info break} or
2493 @code{info watch} to print a list of breakpoints or watchpoints if you
2494 do not know which numbers to use.
2495
2496 A breakpoint or watchpoint can have any of four different states of
2497 enablement:
2498
2499 @itemize @bullet
2500 @item
2501 Enabled. The breakpoint stops your program. A breakpoint set
2502 with the @code{break} command starts out in this state.
2503 @item
2504 Disabled. The breakpoint has no effect on your program.
2505 @item
2506 Enabled once. The breakpoint stops your program, but then becomes
2507 disabled. A breakpoint set with the @code{tbreak} command starts out in
2508 this state.
2509 @item
2510 Enabled for deletion. The breakpoint stops your program, but
2511 immediately after it does so it is deleted permanently.
2512 @end itemize
2513
2514 You can use the following commands to enable or disable breakpoints and
2515 watchpoints:
2516
2517 @table @code
2518 @item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2519 @kindex disable breakpoints
2520 @kindex disable
2521 @kindex dis
2522 Disable the specified breakpoints---or all breakpoints, if none are
2523 listed. A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten. All
2524 options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are remembered in
2525 case the breakpoint is enabled again later. You may abbreviate
2526 @code{disable} as @code{dis}.
2527
2528 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2529 @kindex enable breakpoints
2530 @kindex enable
2531 Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints). They
2532 become effective once again in stopping your program.
2533
2534 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{bnums}@dots{}
2535 Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily. @value{GDBN} disables any
2536 of these breakpoints immediately after stopping your program.
2537
2538 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{bnums}@dots{}
2539 Enable the specified breakpoints to work once, then die. @value{GDBN}
2540 deletes any of these breakpoints as soon as your program stops there.
2541 @end table
2542
2543 Save for a breakpoint set with @code{tbreak} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2544 ,Setting breakpoints}), breakpoints that you set are initially enabled;
2545 subsequently, they become disabled or enabled only when you use one of
2546 the commands above. (The command @code{until} can set and delete a
2547 breakpoint of its own, but it does not change the state of your other
2548 breakpoints; see @ref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and
2549 stepping}.)
2550
2551 @node Conditions
2552 @subsection Break conditions
2553 @cindex conditional breakpoints
2554 @cindex breakpoint conditions
2555
2556 @c FIXME what is scope of break condition expr? Context where wanted?
2557 @c in particular for a watchpoint?
2558 The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
2559 specified place. You can also specify a @dfn{condition} for a
2560 breakpoint. A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
2561 programming language (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). A breakpoint with
2562 a condition evaluates the expression each time your program reaches it,
2563 and your program stops only if the condition is @emph{true}.
2564
2565 This is the converse of using assertions for program validation; in that
2566 situation, you want to stop when the assertion is violated---that is,
2567 when the condition is false. In C, if you want to test an assertion expressed
2568 by the condition @var{assert}, you should set the condition
2569 @samp{! @var{assert}} on the appropriate breakpoint.
2570
2571 Conditions are also accepted for watchpoints; you may not need them,
2572 since a watchpoint is inspecting the value of an expression anyhow---but
2573 it might be simpler, say, to just set a watchpoint on a variable name,
2574 and specify a condition that tests whether the new value is an interesting
2575 one.
2576
2577 Break conditions can have side effects, and may even call functions in
2578 your program. This can be useful, for example, to activate functions
2579 that log program progress, or to use your own print functions to
2580 format special data structures. The effects are completely predictable
2581 unless there is another enabled breakpoint at the same address. (In
2582 that case, @value{GDBN} might see the other breakpoint first and stop your
2583 program without checking the condition of this one.) Note that
2584 breakpoint commands are usually more convenient and flexible for the
2585 purpose of performing side effects when a breakpoint is reached
2586 (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint command lists}).
2587
2588 Break conditions can be specified when a breakpoint is set, by using
2589 @samp{if} in the arguments to the @code{break} command. @xref{Set
2590 Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}. They can also be changed at any time
2591 with the @code{condition} command. The @code{watch} command does not
2592 recognize the @code{if} keyword; @code{condition} is the only way to
2593 impose a further condition on a watchpoint.
2594
2595 @table @code
2596 @item condition @var{bnum} @var{expression}
2597 @kindex condition
2598 Specify @var{expression} as the break condition for breakpoint or
2599 watchpoint number @var{bnum}. After you set a condition, breakpoint
2600 @var{bnum} stops your program only if the value of @var{expression} is
2601 true (nonzero, in C). When you use @code{condition}, @value{GDBN}
2602 checks @var{expression} immediately for syntactic correctness, and to
2603 determine whether symbols in it have referents in the context of your
2604 breakpoint.
2605 @c FIXME so what does GDB do if there is no referent? Moreover, what
2606 @c about watchpoints?
2607 @value{GDBN} does
2608 not actually evaluate @var{expression} at the time the @code{condition}
2609 command is given, however. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
2610
2611 @item condition @var{bnum}
2612 Remove the condition from breakpoint number @var{bnum}. It becomes
2613 an ordinary unconditional breakpoint.
2614 @end table
2615
2616 @cindex ignore count (of breakpoint)
2617 A special case of a breakpoint condition is to stop only when the
2618 breakpoint has been reached a certain number of times. This is so
2619 useful that there is a special way to do it, using the @dfn{ignore
2620 count} of the breakpoint. Every breakpoint has an ignore count, which
2621 is an integer. Most of the time, the ignore count is zero, and
2622 therefore has no effect. But if your program reaches a breakpoint whose
2623 ignore count is positive, then instead of stopping, it just decrements
2624 the ignore count by one and continues. As a result, if the ignore count
2625 value is @var{n}, the breakpoint does not stop the next @var{n} times
2626 your program reaches it.
2627
2628 @table @code
2629 @item ignore @var{bnum} @var{count}
2630 @kindex ignore
2631 Set the ignore count of breakpoint number @var{bnum} to @var{count}.
2632 The next @var{count} times the breakpoint is reached, your program's
2633 execution does not stop; other than to decrement the ignore count, @value{GDBN}
2634 takes no action.
2635
2636 To make the breakpoint stop the next time it is reached, specify
2637 a count of zero.
2638
2639 When you use @code{continue} to resume execution of your program from a
2640 breakpoint, you can specify an ignore count directly as an argument to
2641 @code{continue}, rather than using @code{ignore}. @xref{Continuing and
2642 Stepping,,Continuing and stepping}.
2643
2644 If a breakpoint has a positive ignore count and a condition, the
2645 condition is not checked. Once the ignore count reaches zero,
2646 @value{GDBN} resumes checking the condition.
2647
2648 You could achieve the effect of the ignore count with a condition such
2649 as @w{@samp{$foo-- <= 0}} using a debugger convenience variable that
2650 is decremented each time. @xref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
2651 variables}.
2652 @end table
2653
2654 @node Break Commands
2655 @subsection Breakpoint command lists
2656
2657 @cindex breakpoint commands
2658 You can give any breakpoint (or watchpoint) a series of commands to
2659 execute when your program stops due to that breakpoint. For example, you
2660 might want to print the values of certain expressions, or enable other
2661 breakpoints.
2662
2663 @table @code
2664 @item commands @r{[}@var{bnum}@r{]}
2665 @itemx @dots{} @var{command-list} @dots{}
2666 @itemx end
2667 @kindex commands
2668 @kindex end
2669 Specify a list of commands for breakpoint number @var{bnum}. The commands
2670 themselves appear on the following lines. Type a line containing just
2671 @code{end} to terminate the commands.
2672
2673 To remove all commands from a breakpoint, type @code{commands} and
2674 follow it immediately with @code{end}; that is, give no commands.
2675
2676 With no @var{bnum} argument, @code{commands} refers to the last
2677 breakpoint or watchpoint set (not to the breakpoint most recently
2678 encountered).
2679 @end table
2680
2681 Pressing @key{RET} as a means of repeating the last @value{GDBN} command is
2682 disabled within a @var{command-list}.
2683
2684 You can use breakpoint commands to start your program up again. Simply
2685 use the @code{continue} command, or @code{step}, or any other command
2686 that resumes execution.
2687
2688 Any other commands in the command list, after a command that resumes
2689 execution, are ignored. This is because any time you resume execution
2690 (even with a simple @code{next} or @code{step}), you may encounter
2691 another breakpoint---which could have its own command list, leading to
2692 ambiguities about which list to execute.
2693
2694 @kindex silent
2695 If the first command you specify in a command list is @code{silent}, the
2696 usual message about stopping at a breakpoint is not printed. This may
2697 be desirable for breakpoints that are to print a specific message and
2698 then continue. If none of the remaining commands print anything, you
2699 see no sign that the breakpoint was reached. @code{silent} is
2700 meaningful only at the beginning of a breakpoint command list.
2701
2702 The commands @code{echo}, @code{output}, and @code{printf} allow you to
2703 print precisely controlled output, and are often useful in silent
2704 breakpoints. @xref{Output, ,Commands for controlled output}.
2705
2706 For example, here is how you could use breakpoint commands to print the
2707 value of @code{x} at entry to @code{foo} whenever @code{x} is positive.
2708
2709 @example
2710 break foo if x>0
2711 commands
2712 silent
2713 printf "x is %d\n",x
2714 cont
2715 end
2716 @end example
2717
2718 One application for breakpoint commands is to compensate for one bug so
2719 you can test for another. Put a breakpoint just after the erroneous line
2720 of code, give it a condition to detect the case in which something
2721 erroneous has been done, and give it commands to assign correct values
2722 to any variables that need them. End with the @code{continue} command
2723 so that your program does not stop, and start with the @code{silent}
2724 command so that no output is produced. Here is an example:
2725
2726 @example
2727 break 403
2728 commands
2729 silent
2730 set x = y + 4
2731 cont
2732 end
2733 @end example
2734
2735 @ifclear CONLY
2736 @node Breakpoint Menus
2737 @subsection Breakpoint menus
2738 @cindex overloading
2739 @cindex symbol overloading
2740
2741 Some programming languages (notably C++) permit a single function name
2742 to be defined several times, for application in different contexts.
2743 This is called @dfn{overloading}. When a function name is overloaded,
2744 @samp{break @var{function}} is not enough to tell @value{GDBN} where you want
2745 a breakpoint. If you realize this is a problem, you can use
2746 something like @samp{break @var{function}(@var{types})} to specify which
2747 particular version of the function you want. Otherwise, @value{GDBN} offers
2748 you a menu of numbered choices for different possible breakpoints, and
2749 waits for your selection with the prompt @samp{>}. The first two
2750 options are always @samp{[0] cancel} and @samp{[1] all}. Typing @kbd{1}
2751 sets a breakpoint at each definition of @var{function}, and typing
2752 @kbd{0} aborts the @code{break} command without setting any new
2753 breakpoints.
2754
2755 For example, the following session excerpt shows an attempt to set a
2756 breakpoint at the overloaded symbol @code{String::after}.
2757 We choose three particular definitions of that function name:
2758
2759 @c FIXME! This is likely to change to show arg type lists, at least
2760 @smallexample
2761 (@value{GDBP}) b String::after
2762 [0] cancel
2763 [1] all
2764 [2] file:String.cc; line number:867
2765 [3] file:String.cc; line number:860
2766 [4] file:String.cc; line number:875
2767 [5] file:String.cc; line number:853
2768 [6] file:String.cc; line number:846
2769 [7] file:String.cc; line number:735
2770 > 2 4 6
2771 Breakpoint 1 at 0xb26c: file String.cc, line 867.
2772 Breakpoint 2 at 0xb344: file String.cc, line 875.
2773 Breakpoint 3 at 0xafcc: file String.cc, line 846.
2774 Multiple breakpoints were set.
2775 Use the "delete" command to delete unwanted
2776 breakpoints.
2777 (@value{GDBP})
2778 @end smallexample
2779 @end ifclear
2780
2781 @ifclear BARETARGET
2782 @node Error in Breakpoints
2783 @subsection ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2784
2785 @c FIXME: "cannot insert breakpoints" error, v unclear.
2786 @c Q in pending mail to Gilmore. ---pesch@cygnus.com, 26mar91
2787 @c some light may be shed by looking at instances of
2788 @c ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT. But error message seems possible otherwise
2789 @c too. pesch, 20sep91
2790 Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
2791 any other process is running that program. In this situation,
2792 attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes @value{GDBN}
2793 to stop the other process.
2794
2795 When this happens, you have three ways to proceed:
2796
2797 @enumerate
2798 @item
2799 Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.
2800
2801 @item
2802 Suspend @value{GDBN}, and copy the file containing your program to a new name.
2803 Resume @value{GDBN} and use the @code{exec-file} command to specify that @value{GDBN}
2804 should run your program under that name. Then start your program again.
2805
2806 @c FIXME: RMS commented here "Show example". Maybe when someone
2807 @c explains the first FIXME: in this section...
2808
2809 @item
2810 Relink your program so that the text segment is nonsharable, using the
2811 linker option @samp{-N}. The operating system limitation may not apply
2812 to nonsharable executables.
2813 @end enumerate
2814 @end ifclear
2815
2816 @node Continuing and Stepping
2817 @section Continuing and stepping
2818
2819 @cindex stepping
2820 @cindex continuing
2821 @cindex resuming execution
2822 @dfn{Continuing} means resuming program execution until your program
2823 completes normally. In contrast, @dfn{stepping} means executing just
2824 one more ``step'' of your program, where ``step'' may mean either one
2825 line of source code, or one machine instruction (depending on what
2826 particular command you use). Either when continuing
2827 or when stepping, your program may stop even sooner, due to
2828 @ifset BARETARGET
2829 a breakpoint.
2830 @end ifset
2831 @ifclear BARETARGET
2832 a breakpoint or a signal. (If due to a signal, you may want to use
2833 @code{handle}, or use @samp{signal 0} to resume execution.
2834 @xref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
2835 @end ifclear
2836
2837 @table @code
2838 @item continue @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2839 @itemx c @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2840 @itemx fg @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2841 @kindex continue
2842 @kindex c
2843 @kindex fg
2844 Resume program execution, at the address where your program last stopped;
2845 any breakpoints set at that address are bypassed. The optional argument
2846 @var{ignore-count} allows you to specify a further number of times to
2847 ignore a breakpoint at this location; its effect is like that of
2848 @code{ignore} (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2849
2850 The argument @var{ignore-count} is meaningful only when your program
2851 stopped due to a breakpoint. At other times, the argument to
2852 @code{continue} is ignored.
2853
2854 The synonyms @code{c} and @code{fg} are provided purely for convenience,
2855 and have exactly the same behavior as @code{continue}.
2856 @end table
2857
2858 To resume execution at a different place, you can use @code{return}
2859 (@pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}) to go back to the
2860 calling function; or @code{jump} (@pxref{Jumping, ,Continuing at a
2861 different address}) to go to an arbitrary location in your program.
2862
2863 A typical technique for using stepping is to set a breakpoint
2864 @ifclear CONLY
2865 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions})
2866 @end ifclear
2867 @ifset CONLY
2868 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints and watchpoints})
2869 @end ifset
2870 at the
2871 beginning of the function or the section of your program where a
2872 problem is believed to lie, run your program until it stops at that
2873 breakpoint, and then step through the suspect area, examining the
2874 variables that are interesting, until you see the problem happen.
2875
2876 @table @code
2877 @item step
2878 @kindex step
2879 @kindex s
2880 Continue running your program until control reaches a different source
2881 line, then stop it and return control to @value{GDBN}. This command is
2882 abbreviated @code{s}.
2883
2884 @quotation
2885 @c "without debugging information" is imprecise; actually "without line
2886 @c numbers in the debugging information". (gcc -g1 has debugging info but
2887 @c not line numbers). But it seems complex to try to make that
2888 @c distinction here.
2889 @emph{Warning:} If you use the @code{step} command while control is
2890 within a function that was compiled without debugging information,
2891 execution proceeds until control reaches a function that does have
2892 debugging information. Likewise, it will not step into a function which
2893 is compiled without debugging information. To step through functions
2894 without debugging information, use the @code{stepi} command, described
2895 below.
2896 @end quotation
2897
2898 @item step @var{count}
2899 Continue running as in @code{step}, but do so @var{count} times. If a
2900 breakpoint is reached,
2901 @ifclear BARETARGET
2902 or a signal not related to stepping occurs before @var{count} steps,
2903 @end ifclear
2904 stepping stops right away.
2905
2906 @item next @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
2907 @kindex next
2908 @kindex n
2909 Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack frame.
2910 Similar to @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the line
2911 of code are executed without stopping. Execution stops when control
2912 reaches a different line of code at the stack level which was executing
2913 when the @code{next} command was given. This command is abbreviated
2914 @code{n}.
2915
2916 An argument @var{count} is a repeat count, as for @code{step}.
2917
2918 @code{next} within a function that lacks debugging information acts like
2919 @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the code of the
2920 function are executed without stopping.
2921
2922 @item finish
2923 @kindex finish
2924 Continue running until just after function in the selected stack frame
2925 returns. Print the returned value (if any).
2926
2927 Contrast this with the @code{return} command (@pxref{Returning,
2928 ,Returning from a function}).
2929
2930 @item until
2931 @kindex until
2932 @itemx u
2933 @kindex u
2934 Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
2935 current stack frame, is reached. This command is used to avoid single
2936 stepping through a loop more than once. It is like the @code{next}
2937 command, except that when @code{until} encounters a jump, it
2938 automatically continues execution until the program counter is greater
2939 than the address of the jump.
2940
2941 This means that when you reach the end of a loop after single stepping
2942 though it, @code{until} makes your program continue execution until it
2943 exits the loop. In contrast, a @code{next} command at the end of a loop
2944 simply steps back to the beginning of the loop, which forces you to step
2945 through the next iteration.
2946
2947 @code{until} always stops your program if it attempts to exit the current
2948 stack frame.
2949
2950 @code{until} may produce somewhat counterintuitive results if the order
2951 of machine code does not match the order of the source lines. For
2952 example, in the following excerpt from a debugging session, the @code{f}
2953 (@code{frame}) command shows that execution is stopped at line
2954 @code{206}; yet when we use @code{until}, we get to line @code{195}:
2955
2956 @example
2957 (@value{GDBP}) f
2958 #0 main (argc=4, argv=0xf7fffae8) at m4.c:206
2959 206 expand_input();
2960 (@value{GDBP}) until
2961 195 for ( ; argc > 0; NEXTARG) @{
2962 @end example
2963
2964 This happened because, for execution efficiency, the compiler had
2965 generated code for the loop closure test at the end, rather than the
2966 start, of the loop---even though the test in a C @code{for}-loop is
2967 written before the body of the loop. The @code{until} command appeared
2968 to step back to the beginning of the loop when it advanced to this
2969 expression; however, it has not really gone to an earlier
2970 statement---not in terms of the actual machine code.
2971
2972 @code{until} with no argument works by means of single
2973 instruction stepping, and hence is slower than @code{until} with an
2974 argument.
2975
2976 @item until @var{location}
2977 @itemx u @var{location}
2978 Continue running your program until either the specified location is
2979 reached, or the current stack frame returns. @var{location} is any of
2980 the forms of argument acceptable to @code{break} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2981 ,Setting breakpoints}). This form of the command uses breakpoints,
2982 and hence is quicker than @code{until} without an argument.
2983
2984 @item stepi
2985 @itemx si
2986 @kindex stepi
2987 @kindex si
2988 Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the debugger.
2989
2990 It is often useful to do @samp{display/i $pc} when stepping by machine
2991 instructions. This makes @value{GDBN} automatically display the next
2992 instruction to be executed, each time your program stops. @xref{Auto
2993 Display,, Automatic display}.
2994
2995 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{step}.
2996
2997 @need 750
2998 @item nexti
2999 @itemx ni
3000 @kindex nexti
3001 @kindex ni
3002 Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
3003 proceed until the function returns.
3004
3005 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{next}.
3006 @end table
3007
3008 @ifset POSIX
3009 @node Signals
3010 @section Signals
3011 @cindex signals
3012
3013 A signal is an asynchronous event that can happen in a program. The
3014 operating system defines the possible kinds of signals, and gives each
3015 kind a name and a number. For example, in Unix @code{SIGINT} is the
3016 signal a program gets when you type an interrupt (often @kbd{C-c});
3017 @code{SIGSEGV} is the signal a program gets from referencing a place in
3018 memory far away from all the areas in use; @code{SIGALRM} occurs when
3019 the alarm clock timer goes off (which happens only if your program has
3020 requested an alarm).
3021
3022 @cindex fatal signals
3023 Some signals, including @code{SIGALRM}, are a normal part of the
3024 functioning of your program. Others, such as @code{SIGSEGV}, indicate
3025 errors; these signals are @dfn{fatal} (kill your program immediately) if the
3026 program has not specified in advance some other way to handle the signal.
3027 @code{SIGINT} does not indicate an error in your program, but it is normally
3028 fatal so it can carry out the purpose of the interrupt: to kill the program.
3029
3030 @value{GDBN} has the ability to detect any occurrence of a signal in your
3031 program. You can tell @value{GDBN} in advance what to do for each kind of
3032 signal.
3033
3034 @cindex handling signals
3035 Normally, @value{GDBN} is set up to ignore non-erroneous signals like @code{SIGALRM}
3036 (so as not to interfere with their role in the functioning of your program)
3037 but to stop your program immediately whenever an error signal happens.
3038 You can change these settings with the @code{handle} command.
3039
3040 @table @code
3041 @item info signals
3042 @kindex info signals
3043 Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how @value{GDBN} has been told to
3044 handle each one. You can use this to see the signal numbers of all
3045 the defined types of signals.
3046
3047 @item handle @var{signal} @var{keywords}@dots{}
3048 @kindex handle
3049 Change the way @value{GDBN} handles signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the
3050 number of a signal or its name (with or without the @samp{SIG} at the
3051 beginning). The @var{keywords} say what change to make.
3052 @end table
3053
3054 @c @group
3055 The keywords allowed by the @code{handle} command can be abbreviated.
3056 Their full names are:
3057
3058 @table @code
3059 @item nostop
3060 @value{GDBN} should not stop your program when this signal happens. It may
3061 still print a message telling you that the signal has come in.
3062
3063 @item stop
3064 @value{GDBN} should stop your program when this signal happens. This implies
3065 the @code{print} keyword as well.
3066
3067 @item print
3068 @value{GDBN} should print a message when this signal happens.
3069
3070 @item noprint
3071 @value{GDBN} should not mention the occurrence of the signal at all. This
3072 implies the @code{nostop} keyword as well.
3073
3074 @item pass
3075 @value{GDBN} should allow your program to see this signal; your program
3076 can handle the signal, or else it may terminate if the signal is fatal
3077 and not handled.
3078
3079 @item nopass
3080 @value{GDBN} should not allow your program to see this signal.
3081 @end table
3082 @c @end group
3083
3084 When a signal stops your program, the signal is not visible until you
3085 continue. Your program sees the signal then, if @code{pass} is in
3086 effect for the signal in question @emph{at that time}. In other words,
3087 after @value{GDBN} reports a signal, you can use the @code{handle}
3088 command with @code{pass} or @code{nopass} to control whether your
3089 program sees that signal when you continue.
3090
3091 You can also use the @code{signal} command to prevent your program from
3092 seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
3093 or to give it any signal at any time. For example, if your program stopped
3094 due to some sort of memory reference error, you might store correct
3095 values into the erroneous variables and continue, hoping to see more
3096 execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
3097 a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal. To prevent this,
3098 you can continue with @samp{signal 0}. @xref{Signaling, ,Giving your
3099 program a signal}.
3100 @end ifset
3101
3102 @ifclear BARETARGET
3103 @node Thread Stops
3104 @section Stopping and starting multi-thread programs
3105
3106 When your program has multiple threads (@pxref{Threads,, Debugging
3107 programs with multiple threads}), you can choose whether to set
3108 breakpoints on all threads, or on a particular thread.
3109
3110 @table @code
3111 @cindex breakpoints and threads
3112 @cindex thread breakpoints
3113 @kindex break @dots{} thread @var{threadno}
3114 @item break @var{linespec} thread @var{threadno}
3115 @itemx break @var{linespec} thread @var{threadno} if @dots{}
3116 Use the qualifier @samp{thread @var{threadno}} with a breakpoint command
3117 to specify that you only want @value{GDBN} to stop the program when a
3118 particular thread reaches this breakpoint. @var{threadno} is one of the
3119 numeric thread identifiers assigned by @value{GDBN}, shown in the first
3120 column of the @samp{info threads} display.
3121
3122 If you do not specify @samp{thread @var{threadno}} when you set a
3123 breakpoint, the breakpoint applies to @emph{all} threads of your
3124 program.
3125
3126 You can use the @code{thread} qualifier on conditional breakpoints as
3127 well; in this case, place @samp{thread @var{threadno}} before the
3128 breakpoint condition, like this:
3129
3130 @smallexample
3131 (gdb) break frik.c:13 thread 28 if bartab > lim
3132 @end smallexample
3133 @end table
3134
3135 @cindex stopped threads
3136 @cindex threads, stopped
3137 Whenever your program stops under @value{GDBN} for any reason,
3138 @emph{all} threads of execution stop, not just the current thread. This
3139 allows you to examine the overall state of the program, including
3140 switching between threads, without worrying that things may change
3141 underfoot.
3142
3143 @cindex continuing threads
3144 @cindex threads, continuing
3145 Conversely, whenever you restart the program, @emph{all} threads start
3146 executing. @emph{This is true even when single-stepping} with commands
3147 like @code{step} or @code{next}.
3148
3149 In particular, @value{GDBN} cannot single-step all threads in lockstep.
3150 Since thread scheduling is up to your debugging target's operating
3151 system (not controlled by @value{GDBN}), other threads may
3152 execute more than one statement while the current thread completes a
3153 single step. Moreover, in general other threads stop in the middle of a
3154 statement, rather than at a clean statement boundary, when the program
3155 stops.
3156
3157 You might even find your program stopped in another thread after
3158 continuing or even single-stepping. This happens whenever some other
3159 thread runs into a breakpoint, a signal, or an exception before the
3160 first thread completes whatever you requested.
3161 @end ifclear
3162
3163 @node Stack
3164 @chapter Examining the Stack
3165
3166 When your program has stopped, the first thing you need to know is where it
3167 stopped and how it got there.
3168
3169 @cindex call stack
3170 Each time your program performs a function call, the information about
3171 where in your program the call was made from is saved in a block of data
3172 called a @dfn{stack frame}. The frame also contains the arguments of the
3173 call and the local variables of the function that was called. All the
3174 stack frames are allocated in a region of memory called the @dfn{call
3175 stack}.
3176
3177 When your program stops, the @value{GDBN} commands for examining the
3178 stack allow you to see all of this information.
3179
3180 @cindex selected frame
3181 One of the stack frames is @dfn{selected} by @value{GDBN} and many
3182 @value{GDBN} commands refer implicitly to the selected frame. In
3183 particular, whenever you ask @value{GDBN} for the value of a variable in
3184 your program, the value is found in the selected frame. There are
3185 special @value{GDBN} commands to select whichever frame you are
3186 interested in.
3187
3188 When your program stops, @value{GDBN} automatically selects the
3189 currently executing frame and describes it briefly as the @code{frame}
3190 command does (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}).
3191
3192 @menu
3193 * Frames:: Stack frames
3194 * Backtrace:: Backtraces
3195 * Selection:: Selecting a frame
3196 * Frame Info:: Information on a frame
3197 @ifset MIPS
3198 * MIPS Stack:: MIPS machines and the function stack
3199 @end ifset
3200 @end menu
3201
3202 @node Frames
3203 @section Stack frames
3204
3205 @cindex frame
3206 @cindex stack frame
3207 The call stack is divided up into contiguous pieces called @dfn{stack
3208 frames}, or @dfn{frames} for short; each frame is the data associated
3209 with one call to one function. The frame contains the arguments given
3210 to the function, the function's local variables, and the address at
3211 which the function is executing.
3212
3213 @cindex initial frame
3214 @cindex outermost frame
3215 @cindex innermost frame
3216 When your program is started, the stack has only one frame, that of the
3217 function @code{main}. This is called the @dfn{initial} frame or the
3218 @dfn{outermost} frame. Each time a function is called, a new frame is
3219 made. Each time a function returns, the frame for that function invocation
3220 is eliminated. If a function is recursive, there can be many frames for
3221 the same function. The frame for the function in which execution is
3222 actually occurring is called the @dfn{innermost} frame. This is the most
3223 recently created of all the stack frames that still exist.
3224
3225 @cindex frame pointer
3226 Inside your program, stack frames are identified by their addresses. A
3227 stack frame consists of many bytes, each of which has its own address; each
3228 kind of computer has a convention for choosing one of those bytes whose
3229 address serves as the address of the frame. Usually this address is kept
3230 in a register called the @dfn{frame pointer register} while execution is
3231 going on in that frame.
3232
3233 @cindex frame number
3234 @value{GDBN} assigns numbers to all existing stack frames, starting with
3235 zero for the innermost frame, one for the frame that called it,
3236 and so on upward. These numbers do not really exist in your program;
3237 they are assigned by @value{GDBN} to give you a way of designating stack
3238 frames in @value{GDBN} commands.
3239
3240 @c below produces an acceptable overful hbox. --mew 13aug1993
3241 @cindex frameless execution
3242 Some compilers provide a way to compile functions so that they operate
3243 without stack frames. (For example, the @code{@value{GCC}} option
3244 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} generates functions without a frame.)
3245 This is occasionally done with heavily used library functions to save
3246 the frame setup time. @value{GDBN} has limited facilities for dealing
3247 with these function invocations. If the innermost function invocation
3248 has no stack frame, @value{GDBN} nevertheless regards it as though
3249 it had a separate frame, which is numbered zero as usual, allowing
3250 correct tracing of the function call chain. However, @value{GDBN} has
3251 no provision for frameless functions elsewhere in the stack.
3252
3253 @node Backtrace
3254 @section Backtraces
3255
3256 A backtrace is a summary of how your program got where it is. It shows one
3257 line per frame, for many frames, starting with the currently executing
3258 frame (frame zero), followed by its caller (frame one), and on up the
3259 stack.
3260
3261 @table @code
3262 @item backtrace
3263 @itemx bt
3264 @kindex backtrace
3265 @kindex bt
3266 Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
3267 frames in the stack.
3268
3269 You can stop the backtrace at any time by typing the system interrupt
3270 character, normally @kbd{C-c}.
3271
3272 @item backtrace @var{n}
3273 @itemx bt @var{n}
3274 Similar, but print only the innermost @var{n} frames.
3275
3276 @item backtrace -@var{n}
3277 @itemx bt -@var{n}
3278 Similar, but print only the outermost @var{n} frames.
3279 @end table
3280
3281 @kindex where
3282 @kindex info stack
3283 @kindex info s
3284 The names @code{where} and @code{info stack} (abbreviated @code{info s})
3285 are additional aliases for @code{backtrace}.
3286
3287 Each line in the backtrace shows the frame number and the function name.
3288 The program counter value is also shown---unless you use @code{set
3289 print address off}. The backtrace also shows the source file name and
3290 line number, as well as the arguments to the function. The program
3291 counter value is omitted if it is at the beginning of the code for that
3292 line number.
3293
3294 Here is an example of a backtrace. It was made with the command
3295 @samp{bt 3}, so it shows the innermost three frames.
3296
3297 @smallexample
3298 @group
3299 #0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
3300 at builtin.c:993
3301 #1 0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
3302 #2 0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
3303 at macro.c:71
3304 (More stack frames follow...)
3305 @end group
3306 @end smallexample
3307
3308 @noindent
3309 The display for frame zero does not begin with a program counter
3310 value, indicating that your program has stopped at the beginning of the
3311 code for line @code{993} of @code{builtin.c}.
3312
3313 @node Selection
3314 @section Selecting a frame
3315
3316 Most commands for examining the stack and other data in your program work on
3317 whichever stack frame is selected at the moment. Here are the commands for
3318 selecting a stack frame; all of them finish by printing a brief description
3319 of the stack frame just selected.
3320
3321 @table @code
3322 @item frame @var{n}
3323 @itemx f @var{n}
3324 @kindex frame
3325 @kindex f
3326 Select frame number @var{n}. Recall that frame zero is the innermost
3327 (currently executing) frame, frame one is the frame that called the
3328 innermost one, and so on. The highest-numbered frame is the one for
3329 @code{main}.
3330
3331 @item frame @var{addr}
3332 @itemx f @var{addr}
3333 Select the frame at address @var{addr}. This is useful mainly if the
3334 chaining of stack frames has been damaged by a bug, making it
3335 impossible for @value{GDBN} to assign numbers properly to all frames. In
3336 addition, this can be useful when your program has multiple stacks and
3337 switches between them.
3338
3339 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
3340 On the SPARC architecture, @code{frame} needs two addresses to
3341 select an arbitrary frame: a frame pointer and a stack pointer.
3342
3343 On the MIPS and Alpha architecture, it needs two addresses: a stack
3344 pointer and a program counter.
3345
3346 On the 29k architecture, it needs three addresses: a register stack
3347 pointer, a program counter, and a memory stack pointer.
3348 @c note to future updaters: this is conditioned on a flag
3349 @c SETUP_ARBITRARY_FRAME in the tm-*.h files. The above is up to date
3350 @c as of 27 Jan 1994.
3351 @end ifclear
3352
3353 @item up @var{n}
3354 @kindex up
3355 Move @var{n} frames up the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3356 advances toward the outermost frame, to higher frame numbers, to frames
3357 that have existed longer. @var{n} defaults to one.
3358
3359 @item down @var{n}
3360 @kindex down
3361 @kindex do
3362 Move @var{n} frames down the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3363 advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to frames
3364 that were created more recently. @var{n} defaults to one. You may
3365 abbreviate @code{down} as @code{do}.
3366 @end table
3367
3368 All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing the
3369 frame. The first line shows the frame number, the function name, the
3370 arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
3371 frame. The second line shows the text of that source line.
3372
3373 @need 1000
3374 For example:
3375
3376 @smallexample
3377 @group
3378 (@value{GDBP}) up
3379 #1 0x22f0 in main (argc=1, argv=0xf7fffbf4, env=0xf7fffbfc)
3380 at env.c:10
3381 10 read_input_file (argv[i]);
3382 @end group
3383 @end smallexample
3384
3385 After such a printout, the @code{list} command with no arguments
3386 prints ten lines centered on the point of execution in the frame.
3387 @xref{List, ,Printing source lines}.
3388
3389 @table @code
3390 @item up-silently @var{n}
3391 @itemx down-silently @var{n}
3392 @kindex down-silently
3393 @kindex up-silently
3394 These two commands are variants of @code{up} and @code{down},
3395 respectively; they differ in that they do their work silently, without
3396 causing display of the new frame. They are intended primarily for use
3397 in @value{GDBN} command scripts, where the output might be unnecessary and
3398 distracting.
3399 @end table
3400
3401 @node Frame Info
3402 @section Information about a frame
3403
3404 There are several other commands to print information about the selected
3405 stack frame.
3406
3407 @table @code
3408 @item frame
3409 @itemx f
3410 When used without any argument, this command does not change which
3411 frame is selected, but prints a brief description of the currently
3412 selected stack frame. It can be abbreviated @code{f}. With an
3413 argument, this command is used to select a stack frame.
3414 @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3415
3416 @item info frame
3417 @itemx info f
3418 @kindex info frame
3419 @kindex info f
3420 This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack frame,
3421 including the address of the frame, the addresses of the next frame down
3422 (called by this frame) and the next frame up (caller of this frame), the
3423 language that the source code corresponding to this frame was written in,
3424 the address of the frame's arguments, the program counter saved in it
3425 (the address of execution in the caller frame), and which registers
3426 were saved in the frame. The verbose description is useful when
3427 something has gone wrong that has made the stack format fail to fit
3428 the usual conventions.
3429
3430 @item info frame @var{addr}
3431 @itemx info f @var{addr}
3432 Print a verbose description of the frame at address @var{addr}, without
3433 selecting that frame. The selected frame remains unchanged by this
3434 command. This requires the same kind of address (more than one for some
3435 architectures) that you specify in the @code{frame} command.
3436 @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3437
3438 @item info args
3439 @kindex info args
3440 Print the arguments of the selected frame, each on a separate line.
3441
3442 @item info locals
3443 @kindex info locals
3444 Print the local variables of the selected frame, each on a separate
3445 line. These are all variables (declared either static or automatic)
3446 accessible at the point of execution of the selected frame.
3447
3448 @ifclear CONLY
3449 @item info catch
3450 @kindex info catch
3451 @cindex catch exceptions
3452 @cindex exception handlers
3453 Print a list of all the exception handlers that are active in the
3454 current stack frame at the current point of execution. To see other
3455 exception handlers, visit the associated frame (using the @code{up},
3456 @code{down}, or @code{frame} commands); then type @code{info catch}.
3457 @xref{Exception Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
3458 @end ifclear
3459 @end table
3460
3461 @ifset MIPS
3462 @node MIPS Stack
3463 @section MIPS machines and the function stack
3464
3465 @cindex stack on MIPS
3466 @cindex MIPS stack
3467 MIPS based computers use an unusual stack frame, which sometimes
3468 requires @value{GDBN} to search backward in the object code to find the
3469 beginning of a function.
3470
3471 @cindex response time, MIPS debugging
3472 To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
3473 @value{GDBN} may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search)
3474 you may want to limit the size of this search, using one of these
3475 commands:
3476 @c FIXME! So what happens when GDB does *not* find the beginning of a
3477 @c function?
3478
3479 @cindex @code{heuristic-fence-post} (MIPS)
3480 @table @code
3481 @item set heuristic-fence-post @var{limit}
3482 Restrict @value{GDBN} to examining at most @var{limit} bytes in its search
3483 for the beginning of a function. A value of @code{0} (the default)
3484 means there is no limit.
3485
3486 @item show heuristic-fence-post
3487 Display the current limit.
3488 @end table
3489
3490 @noindent
3491 These commands are available @emph{only} when @value{GDBN} is configured
3492 for debugging programs on MIPS processors.
3493 @end ifset
3494
3495 @node Source
3496 @chapter Examining Source Files
3497
3498 @value{GDBN} can print parts of your program's source, since the debugging
3499 information recorded in the program tells @value{GDBN} what source files were
3500 used to build it. When your program stops, @value{GDBN} spontaneously prints
3501 the line where it stopped. Likewise, when you select a stack frame
3502 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}), @value{GDBN} prints the line where
3503 execution in that frame has stopped. You can print other portions of
3504 source files by explicit command.
3505
3506 @ifclear DOSHOST
3507 If you use @value{GDBN} through its GNU Emacs interface, you may prefer to use
3508 Emacs facilities to view source; @pxref{Emacs, ,Using @value{GDBN} under GNU
3509 Emacs}.
3510 @end ifclear
3511
3512 @menu
3513 * List:: Printing source lines
3514 @ifclear DOSHOST
3515 * Search:: Searching source files
3516 @end ifclear
3517
3518 * Source Path:: Specifying source directories
3519 * Machine Code:: Source and machine code
3520 @end menu
3521
3522 @node List
3523 @section Printing source lines
3524
3525 @kindex list
3526 @kindex l
3527 To print lines from a source file, use the @code{list} command
3528 (abbreviated @code{l}). There are several ways to specify what part
3529 of the file you want to print.
3530
3531 Here are the forms of the @code{list} command most commonly used:
3532
3533 @table @code
3534 @item list @var{linenum}
3535 Print lines centered around line number @var{linenum} in the
3536 current source file.
3537
3538 @item list @var{function}
3539 Print lines centered around the beginning of function
3540 @var{function}.
3541
3542 @item list
3543 Print more lines. If the last lines printed were printed with a
3544 @code{list} command, this prints lines following the last lines
3545 printed; however, if the last line printed was a solitary line printed
3546 as part of displaying a stack frame (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the
3547 Stack}), this prints lines centered around that line.
3548
3549 @item list -
3550 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3551 @end table
3552
3553 By default, @value{GDBN} prints ten source lines with any of these forms of
3554 the @code{list} command. You can change this using @code{set listsize}:
3555
3556 @table @code
3557 @item set listsize @var{count}
3558 @kindex set listsize
3559 Make the @code{list} command display @var{count} source lines (unless
3560 the @code{list} argument explicitly specifies some other number).
3561
3562 @item show listsize
3563 @kindex show listsize
3564 Display the number of lines that @code{list} prints.
3565 @end table
3566
3567 Repeating a @code{list} command with @key{RET} discards the argument,
3568 so it is equivalent to typing just @code{list}. This is more useful
3569 than listing the same lines again. An exception is made for an
3570 argument of @samp{-}; that argument is preserved in repetition so that
3571 each repetition moves up in the source file.
3572
3573 @cindex linespec
3574 In general, the @code{list} command expects you to supply zero, one or two
3575 @dfn{linespecs}. Linespecs specify source lines; there are several ways
3576 of writing them but the effect is always to specify some source line.
3577 Here is a complete description of the possible arguments for @code{list}:
3578
3579 @table @code
3580 @item list @var{linespec}
3581 Print lines centered around the line specified by @var{linespec}.
3582
3583 @item list @var{first},@var{last}
3584 Print lines from @var{first} to @var{last}. Both arguments are
3585 linespecs.
3586
3587 @item list ,@var{last}
3588 Print lines ending with @var{last}.
3589
3590 @item list @var{first},
3591 Print lines starting with @var{first}.
3592
3593 @item list +
3594 Print lines just after the lines last printed.
3595
3596 @item list -
3597 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3598
3599 @item list
3600 As described in the preceding table.
3601 @end table
3602
3603 Here are the ways of specifying a single source line---all the
3604 kinds of linespec.
3605
3606 @table @code
3607 @item @var{number}
3608 Specifies line @var{number} of the current source file.
3609 When a @code{list} command has two linespecs, this refers to
3610 the same source file as the first linespec.
3611
3612 @item +@var{offset}
3613 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines after the last line printed.
3614 When used as the second linespec in a @code{list} command that has
3615 two, this specifies the line @var{offset} lines down from the
3616 first linespec.
3617
3618 @item -@var{offset}
3619 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines before the last line printed.
3620
3621 @item @var{filename}:@var{number}
3622 Specifies line @var{number} in the source file @var{filename}.
3623
3624 @item @var{function}
3625 @c FIXME: "of the open-brace" is C-centric. When we add other langs...
3626 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3627 function @var{function}.
3628
3629 @item @var{filename}:@var{function}
3630 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3631 function @var{function} in the file @var{filename}. You only need the
3632 file name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
3633 identically named functions in different source files.
3634
3635 @item *@var{address}
3636 Specifies the line containing the program address @var{address}.
3637 @var{address} may be any expression.
3638 @end table
3639
3640 @ifclear DOSHOST
3641 @node Search
3642 @section Searching source files
3643 @cindex searching
3644 @kindex reverse-search
3645
3646 There are two commands for searching through the current source file for a
3647 regular expression.
3648
3649 @table @code
3650 @item forward-search @var{regexp}
3651 @itemx search @var{regexp}
3652 @kindex search
3653 @kindex forward-search
3654 The command @samp{forward-search @var{regexp}} checks each line,
3655 starting with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
3656 @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can use
3657 synonym @samp{search @var{regexp}} or abbreviate the command name as
3658 @code{fo}.
3659
3660 @item reverse-search @var{regexp}
3661 The command @samp{reverse-search @var{regexp}} checks each line, starting
3662 with the one before the last line listed and going backward, for a match
3663 for @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can abbreviate
3664 this command as @code{rev}.
3665 @end table
3666 @end ifclear
3667
3668 @node Source Path
3669 @section Specifying source directories
3670
3671 @cindex source path
3672 @cindex directories for source files
3673 Executable programs sometimes do not record the directories of the source
3674 files from which they were compiled, just the names. Even when they do,
3675 the directories could be moved between the compilation and your debugging
3676 session. @value{GDBN} has a list of directories to search for source files;
3677 this is called the @dfn{source path}. Each time @value{GDBN} wants a source file,
3678 it tries all the directories in the list, in the order they are present
3679 in the list, until it finds a file with the desired name. Note that
3680 the executable search path is @emph{not} used for this purpose. Neither is
3681 the current working directory, unless it happens to be in the source
3682 path.
3683
3684 If @value{GDBN} cannot find a source file in the source path, and the
3685 object program records a directory, @value{GDBN} tries that directory
3686 too. If the source path is empty, and there is no record of the
3687 compilation directory, @value{GDBN} looks in the current directory as a
3688 last resort.
3689
3690 Whenever you reset or rearrange the source path, @value{GDBN} clears out
3691 any information it has cached about where source files are found and where
3692 each line is in the file.
3693
3694 @kindex directory
3695 When you start @value{GDBN}, its source path is empty.
3696 To add other directories, use the @code{directory} command.
3697
3698 @table @code
3699 @item directory @var{dirname} @dots{}
3700 Add directory @var{dirname} to the front of the source path. Several
3701 directory names may be given to this command, separated by @samp{:} or
3702 whitespace. You may specify a directory that is already in the source
3703 path; this moves it forward, so @value{GDBN} searches it sooner.
3704
3705 @kindex cdir
3706 @kindex cwd
3707 @kindex $cdir
3708 @kindex $cwd
3709 @cindex compilation directory
3710 @cindex current directory
3711 @cindex working directory
3712 @cindex directory, current
3713 @cindex directory, compilation
3714 You can use the string @samp{$cdir} to refer to the compilation
3715 directory (if one is recorded), and @samp{$cwd} to refer to the current
3716 working directory. @samp{$cwd} is not the same as @samp{.}---the former
3717 tracks the current working directory as it changes during your @value{GDBN}
3718 session, while the latter is immediately expanded to the current
3719 directory at the time you add an entry to the source path.
3720
3721 @item directory
3722 Reset the source path to empty again. This requires confirmation.
3723
3724 @c RET-repeat for @code{directory} is explicitly disabled, but since
3725 @c repeating it would be a no-op we do not say that. (thanks to RMS)
3726
3727 @item show directories
3728 @kindex show directories
3729 Print the source path: show which directories it contains.
3730 @end table
3731
3732 If your source path is cluttered with directories that are no longer of
3733 interest, @value{GDBN} may sometimes cause confusion by finding the wrong
3734 versions of source. You can correct the situation as follows:
3735
3736 @enumerate
3737 @item
3738 Use @code{directory} with no argument to reset the source path to empty.
3739
3740 @item
3741 Use @code{directory} with suitable arguments to reinstall the
3742 directories you want in the source path. You can add all the
3743 directories in one command.
3744 @end enumerate
3745
3746 @node Machine Code
3747 @section Source and machine code
3748
3749 You can use the command @code{info line} to map source lines to program
3750 addresses (and vice versa), and the command @code{disassemble} to display
3751 a range of addresses as machine instructions.
3752
3753 @table @code
3754 @item info line @var{linespec}
3755 @kindex info line
3756 Print the starting and ending addresses of the compiled code for
3757 source line @var{linespec}. You can specify source lines in any of
3758 the ways understood by the @code{list} command (@pxref{List, ,Printing
3759 source lines}).
3760 @end table
3761
3762 For example, we can use @code{info line} to discover the location of
3763 the object code for the first line of function
3764 @code{m4_changequote}:
3765
3766 @smallexample
3767 (@value{GDBP}) info line m4_changecom
3768 Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.
3769 @end smallexample
3770
3771 @noindent
3772 We can also inquire (using @code{*@var{addr}} as the form for
3773 @var{linespec}) what source line covers a particular address:
3774 @smallexample
3775 (@value{GDBP}) info line *0x63ff
3776 Line 926 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x63e4 and ends at 0x6404.
3777 @end smallexample
3778
3779 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info line}
3780 After @code{info line}, the default address for the @code{x} command
3781 is changed to the starting address of the line, so that @samp{x/i} is
3782 sufficient to begin examining the machine code (@pxref{Memory,
3783 ,Examining memory}). Also, this address is saved as the value of the
3784 convenience variable @code{$_} (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3785 variables}).
3786
3787 @table @code
3788 @kindex disassemble
3789 @item disassemble
3790 @cindex assembly instructions
3791 @cindex instructions, assembly
3792 @cindex machine instructions
3793 @cindex listing machine instructions
3794 This specialized command dumps a range of memory as machine
3795 instructions. The default memory range is the function surrounding the
3796 program counter of the selected frame. A single argument to this
3797 command is a program counter value; @value{GDBN} dumps the function
3798 surrounding this value. Two arguments specify a range of addresses
3799 (first inclusive, second exclusive) to dump.
3800 @end table
3801
3802 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
3803 We can use @code{disassemble} to inspect the object code
3804 range shown in the last @code{info line} example (the example
3805 shows SPARC machine instructions):
3806
3807
3808 @smallexample
3809 (@value{GDBP}) disas 0x63e4 0x6404
3810 Dump of assembler code from 0x63e4 to 0x6404:
3811 0x63e4 <builtin_init+5340>: ble 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>
3812 0x63e8 <builtin_init+5344>: sethi %hi(0x4c00), %o0
3813 0x63ec <builtin_init+5348>: ld [%i1+4], %o0
3814 0x63f0 <builtin_init+5352>: b 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>
3815 0x63f4 <builtin_init+5356>: ld [%o0+4], %o0
3816 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>: or %o0, 0x1a4, %o0
3817 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>: call 0x9288 <path_search>
3818 0x6400 <builtin_init+5368>: nop
3819 End of assembler dump.
3820 @end smallexample
3821 @end ifclear
3822
3823 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
3824 For example, here is the beginning of the output for the
3825 disassembly of a function @code{fact}:
3826
3827
3828 @smallexample
3829 (@value{GDBP}) disas fact
3830 Dump of assembler code for function fact:
3831 to 0x808c:
3832 0x802c <fact>: 6d f2 mov.w r2,@@-r7
3833 0x802e <fact+2>: 6d f3 mov.w r3,@@-r7
3834 0x8030 <fact+4>: 6d f6 mov.w r6,@@-r7
3835 0x8032 <fact+6>: 0d 76 mov.w r7,r6
3836 0x8034 <fact+8>: 6f 70 00 08 mov.w @@(0x8,r7),r0
3837 0x8038 <fact+12> 19 11 sub.w r1,r1
3838 .
3839 .
3840 .
3841 @end smallexample
3842 @end ifset
3843
3844 @node Data
3845 @chapter Examining Data
3846
3847 @cindex printing data
3848 @cindex examining data
3849 @kindex print
3850 @kindex inspect
3851 @c "inspect" is not quite a synonym if you are using Epoch, which we do not
3852 @c document because it is nonstandard... Under Epoch it displays in a
3853 @c different window or something like that.
3854 The usual way to examine data in your program is with the @code{print}
3855 command (abbreviated @code{p}), or its synonym @code{inspect}.
3856 @ifclear CONLY
3857 It evaluates and prints the value of an expression of the language your
3858 program is written in (@pxref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3859 Languages}).
3860 @end ifclear
3861
3862 @table @code
3863 @item print @var{exp}
3864 @itemx print /@var{f} @var{exp}
3865 @var{exp} is an expression (in the source language). By default the
3866 value of @var{exp} is printed in a format appropriate to its data type;
3867 you can choose a different format by specifying @samp{/@var{f}}, where
3868 @var{f} is a letter specifying the format; @pxref{Output Formats,,Output
3869 formats}.
3870
3871 @item print
3872 @itemx print /@var{f}
3873 If you omit @var{exp}, @value{GDBN} displays the last value again (from the
3874 @dfn{value history}; @pxref{Value History, ,Value history}). This allows you to
3875 conveniently inspect the same value in an alternative format.
3876 @end table
3877
3878 A more low-level way of examining data is with the @code{x} command.
3879 It examines data in memory at a specified address and prints it in a
3880 specified format. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
3881
3882 If you are interested in information about types, or about how the fields
3883 of a struct
3884 @ifclear CONLY
3885 or class
3886 @end ifclear
3887 are declared, use the @code{ptype @var{exp}}
3888 command rather than @code{print}. @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
3889
3890 @menu
3891 * Expressions:: Expressions
3892 * Variables:: Program variables
3893 * Arrays:: Artificial arrays
3894 * Output Formats:: Output formats
3895 * Memory:: Examining memory
3896 * Auto Display:: Automatic display
3897 * Print Settings:: Print settings
3898 * Value History:: Value history
3899 * Convenience Vars:: Convenience variables
3900 * Registers:: Registers
3901 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
3902 * Floating Point Hardware:: Floating point hardware
3903 @end ifclear
3904 @end menu
3905
3906 @node Expressions
3907 @section Expressions
3908
3909 @cindex expressions
3910 @code{print} and many other @value{GDBN} commands accept an expression and
3911 compute its value. Any kind of constant, variable or operator defined
3912 by the programming language you are using is valid in an expression in
3913 @value{GDBN}. This includes conditional expressions, function calls, casts
3914 and string constants. It unfortunately does not include symbols defined
3915 by preprocessor @code{#define} commands.
3916
3917 @ifclear CONLY
3918 Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in examples in
3919 this manual are in C. @xref{Languages, , Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3920 Languages}, for information on how to use expressions in other
3921 languages.
3922
3923 In this section, we discuss operators that you can use in @value{GDBN}
3924 expressions regardless of your programming language.
3925
3926 Casts are supported in all languages, not just in C, because it is so
3927 useful to cast a number into a pointer so as to examine a structure
3928 at that address in memory.
3929 @c FIXME: casts supported---Mod2 true?
3930 @end ifclear
3931
3932 @value{GDBN} supports these operators in addition to those of programming
3933 languages:
3934
3935 @table @code
3936 @item @@
3937 @samp{@@} is a binary operator for treating parts of memory as arrays.
3938 @xref{Arrays, ,Artificial arrays}, for more information.
3939
3940 @item ::
3941 @samp{::} allows you to specify a variable in terms of the file or
3942 function where it is defined. @xref{Variables, ,Program variables}.
3943
3944 @item @{@var{type}@} @var{addr}
3945 @cindex @{@var{type}@}
3946 @cindex type casting memory
3947 @cindex memory, viewing as typed object
3948 @cindex casts, to view memory
3949 Refers to an object of type @var{type} stored at address @var{addr} in
3950 memory. @var{addr} may be any expression whose value is an integer or
3951 pointer (but parentheses are required around binary operators, just as in
3952 a cast). This construct is allowed regardless of what kind of data is
3953 normally supposed to reside at @var{addr}.
3954 @end table
3955
3956 @node Variables
3957 @section Program variables
3958
3959 The most common kind of expression to use is the name of a variable
3960 in your program.
3961
3962 Variables in expressions are understood in the selected stack frame
3963 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}); they must either be global
3964 (or static) or be visible according to the scope rules of the
3965 programming language from the point of execution in that frame. This
3966 means that in the function
3967
3968 @example
3969 foo (a)
3970 int a;
3971 @{
3972 bar (a);
3973 @{
3974 int b = test ();
3975 bar (b);
3976 @}
3977 @}
3978 @end example
3979
3980 @noindent
3981 you can examine and use the variable @code{a} whenever your program is
3982 executing within the function @code{foo}, but you can only use or
3983 examine the variable @code{b} while your program is executing inside
3984 the block where @code{b} is declared.
3985
3986 @cindex variable name conflict
3987 There is an exception: you can refer to a variable or function whose
3988 scope is a single source file even if the current execution point is not
3989 in this file. But it is possible to have more than one such variable or
3990 function with the same name (in different source files). If that
3991 happens, referring to that name has unpredictable effects. If you wish,
3992 you can specify a static variable in a particular function or file,
3993 using the colon-colon notation:
3994
3995 @cindex colon-colon
3996 @iftex
3997 @c info cannot cope with a :: index entry, but why deprive hard copy readers?
3998 @kindex ::
3999 @end iftex
4000 @example
4001 @var{file}::@var{variable}
4002 @var{function}::@var{variable}
4003 @end example
4004
4005 @noindent
4006 Here @var{file} or @var{function} is the name of the context for the
4007 static @var{variable}. In the case of file names, you can use quotes to
4008 make sure @value{GDBN} parses the file name as a single word---for example,
4009 to print a global value of @code{x} defined in @file{f2.c}:
4010
4011 @example
4012 (@value{GDBP}) p 'f2.c'::x
4013 @end example
4014
4015 @ifclear CONLY
4016 @cindex C++ scope resolution
4017 This use of @samp{::} is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
4018 use of the same notation in C++. @value{GDBN} also supports use of the C++
4019 scope resolution operator in @value{GDBN} expressions.
4020 @c FIXME: Um, so what happens in one of those rare cases where it's in
4021 @c conflict?? --mew
4022 @end ifclear
4023
4024 @cindex wrong values
4025 @cindex variable values, wrong
4026 @quotation
4027 @emph{Warning:} Occasionally, a local variable may appear to have the
4028 wrong value at certain points in a function---just after entry to a new
4029 scope, and just before exit.
4030 @end quotation
4031 You may see this problem when you are stepping by machine instructions.
4032 This is because on most machines, it takes more than one instruction to
4033 set up a stack frame (including local variable definitions); if you are
4034 stepping by machine instructions, variables may appear to have the wrong
4035 values until the stack frame is completely built. On exit, it usually
4036 also takes more than one machine instruction to destroy a stack frame;
4037 after you begin stepping through that group of instructions, local
4038 variable definitions may be gone.
4039
4040 @node Arrays
4041 @section Artificial arrays
4042
4043 @cindex artificial array
4044 @kindex @@
4045 It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the
4046 same type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of
4047 dynamically determined size for which only a pointer exists in the
4048 program.
4049
4050 You can do this by referring to a contiguous span of memory as an
4051 @dfn{artificial array}, using the binary operator @samp{@@}. The left
4052 operand of @samp{@@} should be the first element of the desired array,
4053 as an individual object. The right operand should be the desired length
4054 of the array. The result is an array value whose elements are all of
4055 the type of the left argument. The first element is actually the left
4056 argument; the second element comes from bytes of memory immediately
4057 following those that hold the first element, and so on. Here is an
4058 example. If a program says
4059
4060 @example
4061 int *array = (int *) malloc (len * sizeof (int));
4062 @end example
4063
4064 @noindent
4065 you can print the contents of @code{array} with
4066
4067 @example
4068 p *array@@len
4069 @end example
4070
4071 The left operand of @samp{@@} must reside in memory. Array values made
4072 with @samp{@@} in this way behave just like other arrays in terms of
4073 subscripting, and are coerced to pointers when used in expressions.
4074 Artificial arrays most often appear in expressions via the value history
4075 (@pxref{Value History, ,Value history}), after printing one out.
4076
4077 Another way to create an artificial array is to use a cast.
4078 This re-interprets a value as if it were an array.
4079 The value need not be in memory:
4080 @example
4081 (@value{GDBP}) p/x (short[2])0x12345678
4082 $1 = @{0x1234, 0x5678@}
4083 @end example
4084
4085 As a convenience, if you leave the array length out (as in
4086 @samp{(@var{type})[])@var{value}}) gdb calculates the size to fill
4087 the value (as @samp{sizeof(@var{value})/sizeof(@var{type})}:
4088 @example
4089 (@value{GDBP}) p/x (short[])0x12345678
4090 $2 = @{0x1234, 0x5678@}
4091 @end example
4092
4093 Sometimes the artificial array mechanism is not quite enough; in
4094 moderately complex data structures, the elements of interest may not
4095 actually be adjacent---for example, if you are interested in the values
4096 of pointers in an array. One useful work-around in this situation is
4097 to use a convenience variable (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
4098 variables}) as a counter in an expression that prints the first
4099 interesting value, and then repeat that expression via @key{RET}. For
4100 instance, suppose you have an array @code{dtab} of pointers to
4101 structures, and you are interested in the values of a field @code{fv}
4102 in each structure. Here is an example of what you might type:
4103
4104 @example
4105 set $i = 0
4106 p dtab[$i++]->fv
4107 @key{RET}
4108 @key{RET}
4109 @dots{}
4110 @end example
4111
4112 @node Output Formats
4113 @section Output formats
4114
4115 @cindex formatted output
4116 @cindex output formats
4117 By default, @value{GDBN} prints a value according to its data type. Sometimes
4118 this is not what you want. For example, you might want to print a number
4119 in hex, or a pointer in decimal. Or you might want to view data in memory
4120 at a certain address as a character string or as an instruction. To do
4121 these things, specify an @dfn{output format} when you print a value.
4122
4123 The simplest use of output formats is to say how to print a value
4124 already computed. This is done by starting the arguments of the
4125 @code{print} command with a slash and a format letter. The format
4126 letters supported are:
4127
4128 @table @code
4129 @item x
4130 Regard the bits of the value as an integer, and print the integer in
4131 hexadecimal.
4132
4133 @item d
4134 Print as integer in signed decimal.
4135
4136 @item u
4137 Print as integer in unsigned decimal.
4138
4139 @item o
4140 Print as integer in octal.
4141
4142 @item t
4143 Print as integer in binary. The letter @samp{t} stands for ``two''.
4144 @footnote{@samp{b} cannot be used because these format letters are also
4145 used with the @code{x} command, where @samp{b} stands for ``byte'';
4146 @pxref{Memory,,Examining memory}.}
4147
4148 @item a
4149 @cindex unknown address, locating
4150 Print as an address, both absolute in hexadecimal and as an offset from
4151 the nearest preceding symbol. You can use this format used to discover
4152 where (in what function) an unknown address is located:
4153
4154 @example
4155 (@value{GDBP}) p/a 0x54320
4156 $3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>
4157 @end example
4158
4159 @item c
4160 Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant.
4161
4162 @item f
4163 Regard the bits of the value as a floating point number and print
4164 using typical floating point syntax.
4165 @end table
4166
4167 For example, to print the program counter in hex (@pxref{Registers}), type
4168
4169 @example
4170 p/x $pc
4171 @end example
4172
4173 @noindent
4174 Note that no space is required before the slash; this is because command
4175 names in @value{GDBN} cannot contain a slash.
4176
4177 To reprint the last value in the value history with a different format,
4178 you can use the @code{print} command with just a format and no
4179 expression. For example, @samp{p/x} reprints the last value in hex.
4180
4181 @node Memory
4182 @section Examining memory
4183
4184 You can use the command @code{x} (for ``examine'') to examine memory in
4185 any of several formats, independently of your program's data types.
4186
4187 @cindex examining memory
4188 @table @code
4189 @kindex x
4190 @item x/@var{nfu} @var{addr}
4191 @itemx x @var{addr}
4192 @itemx x
4193 Use the @code{x} command to examine memory.
4194 @end table
4195
4196 @var{n}, @var{f}, and @var{u} are all optional parameters that specify how
4197 much memory to display and how to format it; @var{addr} is an
4198 expression giving the address where you want to start displaying memory.
4199 If you use defaults for @var{nfu}, you need not type the slash @samp{/}.
4200 Several commands set convenient defaults for @var{addr}.
4201
4202 @table @r
4203 @item @var{n}, the repeat count
4204 The repeat count is a decimal integer; the default is 1. It specifies
4205 how much memory (counting by units @var{u}) to display.
4206 @c This really is **decimal**; unaffected by 'set radix' as of GDB
4207 @c 4.1.2.
4208
4209 @item @var{f}, the display format
4210 The display format is one of the formats used by @code{print},
4211 or @samp{s} (null-terminated string) or @samp{i} (machine instruction).
4212 The default is @samp{x} (hexadecimal) initially, or the format from the
4213 last time you used either @code{x} or @code{print}.
4214
4215 @item @var{u}, the unit size
4216 The unit size is any of
4217
4218 @table @code
4219 @item b
4220 Bytes.
4221 @item h
4222 Halfwords (two bytes).
4223 @item w
4224 Words (four bytes). This is the initial default.
4225 @item g
4226 Giant words (eight bytes).
4227 @end table
4228
4229 Each time you specify a unit size with @code{x}, that size becomes the
4230 default unit the next time you use @code{x}. (For the @samp{s} and
4231 @samp{i} formats, the unit size is ignored and is normally not written.)
4232
4233 @item @var{addr}, starting display address
4234 @var{addr} is the address where you want @value{GDBN} to begin displaying
4235 memory. The expression need not have a pointer value (though it may);
4236 it is always interpreted as an integer address of a byte of memory.
4237 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on expressions. The default for
4238 @var{addr} is usually just after the last address examined---but several
4239 other commands also set the default address: @code{info breakpoints} (to
4240 the address of the last breakpoint listed), @code{info line} (to the
4241 starting address of a line), and @code{print} (if you use it to display
4242 a value from memory).
4243 @end table
4244
4245 For example, @samp{x/3uh 0x54320} is a request to display three halfwords
4246 (@code{h}) of memory, formatted as unsigned decimal integers (@samp{u}),
4247 starting at address @code{0x54320}. @samp{x/4xw $sp} prints the four
4248 words (@samp{w}) of memory above the stack pointer (here, @samp{$sp};
4249 @pxref{Registers}) in hexadecimal (@samp{x}).
4250
4251 Since the letters indicating unit sizes are all distinct from the
4252 letters specifying output formats, you do not have to remember whether
4253 unit size or format comes first; either order works. The output
4254 specifications @samp{4xw} and @samp{4wx} mean exactly the same thing.
4255 (However, the count @var{n} must come first; @samp{wx4} does not work.)
4256
4257 Even though the unit size @var{u} is ignored for the formats @samp{s}
4258 and @samp{i}, you might still want to use a count @var{n}; for example,
4259 @samp{3i} specifies that you want to see three machine instructions,
4260 including any operands. The command @code{disassemble} gives an
4261 alternative way of inspecting machine instructions; @pxref{Machine
4262 Code,,Source and machine code}.
4263
4264 All the defaults for the arguments to @code{x} are designed to make it
4265 easy to continue scanning memory with minimal specifications each time
4266 you use @code{x}. For example, after you have inspected three machine
4267 instructions with @samp{x/3i @var{addr}}, you can inspect the next seven
4268 with just @samp{x/7}. If you use @key{RET} to repeat the @code{x} command,
4269 the repeat count @var{n} is used again; the other arguments default as
4270 for successive uses of @code{x}.
4271
4272 @cindex @code{$_}, @code{$__}, and value history
4273 The addresses and contents printed by the @code{x} command are not saved
4274 in the value history because there is often too much of them and they
4275 would get in the way. Instead, @value{GDBN} makes these values available for
4276 subsequent use in expressions as values of the convenience variables
4277 @code{$_} and @code{$__}. After an @code{x} command, the last address
4278 examined is available for use in expressions in the convenience variable
4279 @code{$_}. The contents of that address, as examined, are available in
4280 the convenience variable @code{$__}.
4281
4282 If the @code{x} command has a repeat count, the address and contents saved
4283 are from the last memory unit printed; this is not the same as the last
4284 address printed if several units were printed on the last line of output.
4285
4286 @node Auto Display
4287 @section Automatic display
4288 @cindex automatic display
4289 @cindex display of expressions
4290
4291 If you find that you want to print the value of an expression frequently
4292 (to see how it changes), you might want to add it to the @dfn{automatic
4293 display list} so that @value{GDBN} prints its value each time your program stops.
4294 Each expression added to the list is given a number to identify it;
4295 to remove an expression from the list, you specify that number.
4296 The automatic display looks like this:
4297
4298 @example
4299 2: foo = 38
4300 3: bar[5] = (struct hack *) 0x3804
4301 @end example
4302
4303 @noindent
4304 This display shows item numbers, expressions and their current values. As with
4305 displays you request manually using @code{x} or @code{print}, you can
4306 specify the output format you prefer; in fact, @code{display} decides
4307 whether to use @code{print} or @code{x} depending on how elaborate your
4308 format specification is---it uses @code{x} if you specify a unit size,
4309 or one of the two formats (@samp{i} and @samp{s}) that are only
4310 supported by @code{x}; otherwise it uses @code{print}.
4311
4312 @table @code
4313 @item display @var{exp}
4314 @kindex display
4315 Add the expression @var{exp} to the list of expressions to display
4316 each time your program stops. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
4317
4318 @code{display} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
4319
4320 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{exp}
4321 For @var{fmt} specifying only a display format and not a size or
4322 count, add the expression @var{exp} to the auto-display list but
4323 arrange to display it each time in the specified format @var{fmt}.
4324 @xref{Output Formats,,Output formats}.
4325
4326 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{addr}
4327 For @var{fmt} @samp{i} or @samp{s}, or including a unit-size or a
4328 number of units, add the expression @var{addr} as a memory address to
4329 be examined each time your program stops. Examining means in effect
4330 doing @samp{x/@var{fmt} @var{addr}}. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
4331 @end table
4332
4333 For example, @samp{display/i $pc} can be helpful, to see the machine
4334 instruction about to be executed each time execution stops (@samp{$pc}
4335 is a common name for the program counter; @pxref{Registers}).
4336
4337 @table @code
4338 @item undisplay @var{dnums}@dots{}
4339 @itemx delete display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4340 @kindex delete display
4341 @kindex undisplay
4342 Remove item numbers @var{dnums} from the list of expressions to display.
4343
4344 @code{undisplay} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
4345 (Otherwise you would just get the error @samp{No display number @dots{}}.)
4346
4347 @item disable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4348 @kindex disable display
4349 Disable the display of item numbers @var{dnums}. A disabled display
4350 item is not printed automatically, but is not forgotten. It may be
4351 enabled again later.
4352
4353 @item enable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4354 @kindex enable display
4355 Enable display of item numbers @var{dnums}. It becomes effective once
4356 again in auto display of its expression, until you specify otherwise.
4357
4358 @item display
4359 Display the current values of the expressions on the list, just as is
4360 done when your program stops.
4361
4362 @item info display
4363 @kindex info display
4364 Print the list of expressions previously set up to display
4365 automatically, each one with its item number, but without showing the
4366 values. This includes disabled expressions, which are marked as such.
4367 It also includes expressions which would not be displayed right now
4368 because they refer to automatic variables not currently available.
4369 @end table
4370
4371 If a display expression refers to local variables, then it does not make
4372 sense outside the lexical context for which it was set up. Such an
4373 expression is disabled when execution enters a context where one of its
4374 variables is not defined. For example, if you give the command
4375 @code{display last_char} while inside a function with an argument
4376 @code{last_char}, @value{GDBN} displays this argument while your program
4377 continues to stop inside that function. When it stops elsewhere---where
4378 there is no variable @code{last_char}---the display is disabled
4379 automatically. The next time your program stops where @code{last_char}
4380 is meaningful, you can enable the display expression once again.
4381
4382 @node Print Settings
4383 @section Print settings
4384
4385 @cindex format options
4386 @cindex print settings
4387 @value{GDBN} provides the following ways to control how arrays, structures,
4388 and symbols are printed.
4389
4390 @noindent
4391 These settings are useful for debugging programs in any language:
4392
4393 @table @code
4394 @item set print address
4395 @itemx set print address on
4396 @kindex set print address
4397 @value{GDBN} prints memory addresses showing the location of stack
4398 traces, structure values, pointer values, breakpoints, and so forth,
4399 even when it also displays the contents of those addresses. The default
4400 is @code{on}. For example, this is what a stack frame display looks like, with
4401 @code{set print address on}:
4402
4403 @smallexample
4404 @group
4405 (@value{GDBP}) f
4406 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<<", rq=0x34c88 ">>")
4407 at input.c:530
4408 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4409 @end group
4410 @end smallexample
4411
4412 @item set print address off
4413 Do not print addresses when displaying their contents. For example,
4414 this is the same stack frame displayed with @code{set print address off}:
4415
4416 @smallexample
4417 @group
4418 (@value{GDBP}) set print addr off
4419 (@value{GDBP}) f
4420 #0 set_quotes (lq="<<", rq=">>") at input.c:530
4421 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4422 @end group
4423 @end smallexample
4424
4425 You can use @samp{set print address off} to eliminate all machine
4426 dependent displays from the @value{GDBN} interface. For example, with
4427 @code{print address off}, you should get the same text for backtraces on
4428 all machines---whether or not they involve pointer arguments.
4429
4430 @item show print address
4431 @kindex show print address
4432 Show whether or not addresses are to be printed.
4433 @end table
4434
4435 When @value{GDBN} prints a symbolic address, it normally prints the
4436 closest earlier symbol plus an offset. If that symbol does not uniquely
4437 identify the address (for example, it is a name whose scope is a single
4438 source file), you may need to disambiguate. One way to do this is with
4439 @code{info line}, for example @samp{info line *0x4537}. Alternately,
4440 you can set @value{GDBN} to print the source file and line number when
4441 it prints a symbolic address:
4442
4443 @table @code
4444 @item set print symbol-filename on
4445 @kindex set print symbol-filename
4446 Tell @value{GDBN} to print the source file name and line number of a
4447 symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4448
4449 @item set print symbol-filename off
4450 Do not print source file name and line number of a symbol. This is the
4451 default.
4452
4453 @item show print symbol-filename
4454 @kindex show print symbol-filename
4455 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print the source file name and
4456 line number of a symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4457 @end table
4458
4459 Another situation where it is helpful to show symbol filenames and line
4460 numbers is when disassembling code; @value{GDBN} shows you the line
4461 number and source file that corresponds to each instruction.
4462
4463 Also, you may wish to see the symbolic form only if the address being
4464 printed is reasonably close to the closest earlier symbol:
4465
4466 @table @code
4467 @item set print max-symbolic-offset @var{max-offset}
4468 @kindex set print max-symbolic-offset
4469 Tell @value{GDBN} to only display the symbolic form of an address if the
4470 offset between the closest earlier symbol and the address is less than
4471 @var{max-offset}. The default is 0, which means to always print the
4472 symbolic form of an address, if any symbol precedes it.
4473
4474 @item show print max-symbolic-offset
4475 @kindex show print max-symbolic-offset
4476 Ask how large the maximum offset is that @value{GDBN} prints in a
4477 symbolic address.
4478 @end table
4479
4480 @cindex wild pointer, interpreting
4481 @cindex pointer, finding referent
4482 If you have a pointer and you are not sure where it points, try
4483 @samp{set print symbol-filename on}. Then you can determine the name
4484 and source file location of the variable where it points, using
4485 @samp{p/a @var{pointer}}. This interprets the address in symbolic form.
4486 For example, here @value{GDBN} shows that a variable @code{ptt} points
4487 at another variable @code{t}, defined in @file{hi2.c}:
4488
4489 @example
4490 (@value{GDBP}) set print symbol-filename on
4491 (@value{GDBP}) p/a ptt
4492 $4 = 0xe008 <t in hi2.c>
4493 @end example
4494
4495 @quotation
4496 @emph{Warning:} For pointers that point to a local variable, @samp{p/a}
4497 does not show the symbol name and filename of the referent, even with
4498 the appropriate @code{set print} options turned on.
4499 @end quotation
4500
4501 Other settings control how different kinds of objects are printed:
4502
4503 @table @code
4504 @item set print array
4505 @itemx set print array on
4506 @kindex set print array
4507 Pretty-print arrays. This format is more convenient to read,
4508 but uses more space. The default is off.
4509
4510 @item set print array off
4511 Return to compressed format for arrays.
4512
4513 @item show print array
4514 @kindex show print array
4515 Show whether compressed or pretty format is selected for displaying
4516 arrays.
4517
4518 @item set print elements @var{number-of-elements}
4519 @kindex set print elements
4520 If @value{GDBN} is printing a large array, it stops printing after it has
4521 printed the number of elements set by the @code{set print elements} command.
4522 This limit also applies to the display of strings.
4523 Setting the number of elements to zero means that the printing is unlimited.
4524
4525 @item show print elements
4526 @kindex show print elements
4527 Display the number of elements of a large array that @value{GDBN} prints
4528 before losing patience.
4529
4530 @item set print pretty on
4531 @kindex set print pretty
4532 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in an indented format with one member per
4533 line, like this:
4534
4535 @smallexample
4536 @group
4537 $1 = @{
4538 next = 0x0,
4539 flags = @{
4540 sweet = 1,
4541 sour = 1
4542 @},
4543 meat = 0x54 "Pork"
4544 @}
4545 @end group
4546 @end smallexample
4547
4548 @item set print pretty off
4549 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in a compact format, like this:
4550
4551 @smallexample
4552 @group
4553 $1 = @{next = 0x0, flags = @{sweet = 1, sour = 1@}, \
4554 meat = 0x54 "Pork"@}
4555 @end group
4556 @end smallexample
4557
4558 @noindent
4559 This is the default format.
4560
4561 @item show print pretty
4562 @kindex show print pretty
4563 Show which format @value{GDBN} is using to print structures.
4564
4565 @item set print sevenbit-strings on
4566 @kindex set print sevenbit-strings
4567 Print using only seven-bit characters; if this option is set,
4568 @value{GDBN} displays any eight-bit characters (in strings or
4569 character values) using the notation @code{\}@var{nnn}. This setting is
4570 best if you are working in English (@sc{ascii}) and you use the
4571 high-order bit of characters as a marker or ``meta'' bit.
4572
4573 @item set print sevenbit-strings off
4574 Print full eight-bit characters. This allows the use of more
4575 international character sets, and is the default.
4576
4577 @item show print sevenbit-strings
4578 @kindex show print sevenbit-strings
4579 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} is printing only seven-bit characters.
4580
4581 @item set print union on
4582 @kindex set print union
4583 Tell @value{GDBN} to print unions which are contained in structures. This is the
4584 default setting.
4585
4586 @item set print union off
4587 Tell @value{GDBN} not to print unions which are contained in structures.
4588
4589 @item show print union
4590 @kindex show print union
4591 Ask @value{GDBN} whether or not it will print unions which are contained in
4592 structures.
4593
4594 For example, given the declarations
4595
4596 @smallexample
4597 typedef enum @{Tree, Bug@} Species;
4598 typedef enum @{Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling@} Tree_forms;
4599 typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
4600 Bug_forms;
4601
4602 struct thing @{
4603 Species it;
4604 union @{
4605 Tree_forms tree;
4606 Bug_forms bug;
4607 @} form;
4608 @};
4609
4610 struct thing foo = @{Tree, @{Acorn@}@};
4611 @end smallexample
4612
4613 @noindent
4614 with @code{set print union on} in effect @samp{p foo} would print
4615
4616 @smallexample
4617 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{tree = Acorn, bug = Cocoon@}@}
4618 @end smallexample
4619
4620 @noindent
4621 and with @code{set print union off} in effect it would print
4622
4623 @smallexample
4624 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{...@}@}
4625 @end smallexample
4626 @end table
4627
4628 @ifclear CONLY
4629 @need 1000
4630 @noindent
4631 These settings are of interest when debugging C++ programs:
4632
4633 @table @code
4634 @item set print demangle
4635 @itemx set print demangle on
4636 @kindex set print demangle
4637 Print C++ names in their source form rather than in the encoded
4638 (``mangled'') form passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe
4639 linkage. The default is @samp{on}.
4640
4641 @item show print demangle
4642 @kindex show print demangle
4643 Show whether C++ names are printed in mangled or demangled form.
4644
4645 @item set print asm-demangle
4646 @itemx set print asm-demangle on
4647 @kindex set print asm-demangle
4648 Print C++ names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
4649 in assembler code printouts such as instruction disassemblies.
4650 The default is off.
4651
4652 @item show print asm-demangle
4653 @kindex show print asm-demangle
4654 Show whether C++ names in assembly listings are printed in mangled
4655 or demangled form.
4656
4657 @item set demangle-style @var{style}
4658 @kindex set demangle-style
4659 @cindex C++ symbol decoding style
4660 @cindex symbol decoding style, C++
4661 Choose among several encoding schemes used by different compilers to
4662 represent C++ names. The choices for @var{style} are currently:
4663
4664 @table @code
4665 @item auto
4666 Allow @value{GDBN} to choose a decoding style by inspecting your program.
4667
4668 @item gnu
4669 Decode based on the GNU C++ compiler (@code{g++}) encoding algorithm.
4670
4671 @item lucid
4672 Decode based on the Lucid C++ compiler (@code{lcc}) encoding algorithm.
4673
4674 @item arm
4675 Decode using the algorithm in the @cite{C++ Annotated Reference Manual}.
4676 @strong{Warning:} this setting alone is not sufficient to allow
4677 debugging @code{cfront}-generated executables. @value{GDBN} would
4678 require further enhancement to permit that.
4679 @end table
4680
4681 @item show demangle-style
4682 @kindex show demangle-style
4683 Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C++ symbols.
4684
4685 @item set print object
4686 @itemx set print object on
4687 @kindex set print object
4688 When displaying a pointer to an object, identify the @emph{actual}
4689 (derived) type of the object rather than the @emph{declared} type, using
4690 the virtual function table.
4691
4692 @item set print object off
4693 Display only the declared type of objects, without reference to the
4694 virtual function table. This is the default setting.
4695
4696 @item show print object
4697 @kindex show print object
4698 Show whether actual, or declared, object types are displayed.
4699
4700 @item set print vtbl
4701 @itemx set print vtbl on
4702 @kindex set print vtbl
4703 Pretty print C++ virtual function tables. The default is off.
4704
4705 @item set print vtbl off
4706 Do not pretty print C++ virtual function tables.
4707
4708 @item show print vtbl
4709 @kindex show print vtbl
4710 Show whether C++ virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
4711 @end table
4712 @end ifclear
4713
4714 @node Value History
4715 @section Value history
4716
4717 @cindex value history
4718 Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in the @value{GDBN} @dfn{value
4719 history} so that you can refer to them in other expressions. Values are
4720 kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded (for example with
4721 the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands). When the symbol table
4722 changes, the value history is discarded, since the values may contain
4723 pointers back to the types defined in the symbol table.
4724
4725 @cindex @code{$}
4726 @cindex @code{$$}
4727 @cindex history number
4728 The values printed are given @dfn{history numbers} by which you can
4729 refer to them. These are successive integers starting with one.
4730 @code{print} shows you the history number assigned to a value by
4731 printing @samp{$@var{num} = } before the value; here @var{num} is the
4732 history number.
4733
4734 To refer to any previous value, use @samp{$} followed by the value's
4735 history number. The way @code{print} labels its output is designed to
4736 remind you of this. Just @code{$} refers to the most recent value in
4737 the history, and @code{$$} refers to the value before that.
4738 @code{$$@var{n}} refers to the @var{n}th value from the end; @code{$$2}
4739 is the value just prior to @code{$$}, @code{$$1} is equivalent to
4740 @code{$$}, and @code{$$0} is equivalent to @code{$}.
4741
4742 For example, suppose you have just printed a pointer to a structure and
4743 want to see the contents of the structure. It suffices to type
4744
4745 @example
4746 p *$
4747 @end example
4748
4749 If you have a chain of structures where the component @code{next} points
4750 to the next one, you can print the contents of the next one with this:
4751
4752 @example
4753 p *$.next
4754 @end example
4755
4756 @noindent
4757 You can print successive links in the chain by repeating this
4758 command---which you can do by just typing @key{RET}.
4759
4760 Note that the history records values, not expressions. If the value of
4761 @code{x} is 4 and you type these commands:
4762
4763 @example
4764 print x
4765 set x=5
4766 @end example
4767
4768 @noindent
4769 then the value recorded in the value history by the @code{print} command
4770 remains 4 even though the value of @code{x} has changed.
4771
4772 @table @code
4773 @kindex show values
4774 @item show values
4775 Print the last ten values in the value history, with their item numbers.
4776 This is like @samp{p@ $$9} repeated ten times, except that @code{show
4777 values} does not change the history.
4778
4779 @item show values @var{n}
4780 Print ten history values centered on history item number @var{n}.
4781
4782 @item show values +
4783 Print ten history values just after the values last printed. If no more
4784 values are available, produces no display.
4785 @end table
4786
4787 Pressing @key{RET} to repeat @code{show values @var{n}} has exactly the
4788 same effect as @samp{show values +}.
4789
4790 @node Convenience Vars
4791 @section Convenience variables
4792
4793 @cindex convenience variables
4794 @value{GDBN} provides @dfn{convenience variables} that you can use within
4795 @value{GDBN} to hold on to a value and refer to it later. These variables
4796 exist entirely within @value{GDBN}; they are not part of your program, and
4797 setting a convenience variable has no direct effect on further execution
4798 of your program. That is why you can use them freely.
4799
4800 Convenience variables are prefixed with @samp{$}. Any name preceded by
4801 @samp{$} can be used for a convenience variable, unless it is one of
4802 the predefined machine-specific register names (@pxref{Registers}).
4803 (Value history references, in contrast, are @emph{numbers} preceded
4804 by @samp{$}. @xref{Value History, ,Value history}.)
4805
4806 You can save a value in a convenience variable with an assignment
4807 expression, just as you would set a variable in your program.
4808 For example:
4809
4810 @example
4811 set $foo = *object_ptr
4812 @end example
4813
4814 @noindent
4815 would save in @code{$foo} the value contained in the object pointed to by
4816 @code{object_ptr}.
4817
4818 Using a convenience variable for the first time creates it, but its
4819 value is @code{void} until you assign a new value. You can alter the
4820 value with another assignment at any time.
4821
4822 Convenience variables have no fixed types. You can assign a convenience
4823 variable any type of value, including structures and arrays, even if
4824 that variable already has a value of a different type. The convenience
4825 variable, when used as an expression, has the type of its current value.
4826
4827 @table @code
4828 @item show convenience
4829 @kindex show convenience
4830 Print a list of convenience variables used so far, and their values.
4831 Abbreviated @code{show con}.
4832 @end table
4833
4834 One of the ways to use a convenience variable is as a counter to be
4835 incremented or a pointer to be advanced. For example, to print
4836 a field from successive elements of an array of structures:
4837
4838 @example
4839 set $i = 0
4840 print bar[$i++]->contents
4841 @i{@dots{} repeat that command by typing @key{RET}.}
4842 @end example
4843
4844 Some convenience variables are created automatically by @value{GDBN} and given
4845 values likely to be useful.
4846
4847 @table @code
4848 @item $_
4849 @kindex $_
4850 The variable @code{$_} is automatically set by the @code{x} command to
4851 the last address examined (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}). Other
4852 commands which provide a default address for @code{x} to examine also
4853 set @code{$_} to that address; these commands include @code{info line}
4854 and @code{info breakpoint}. The type of @code{$_} is @code{void *}
4855 except when set by the @code{x} command, in which case it is a pointer
4856 to the type of @code{$__}.
4857
4858 @item $__
4859 @kindex $__
4860 The variable @code{$__} is automatically set by the @code{x} command
4861 to the value found in the last address examined. Its type is chosen
4862 to match the format in which the data was printed.
4863 @end table
4864
4865 @node Registers
4866 @section Registers
4867
4868 @cindex registers
4869 You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
4870 with names starting with @samp{$}. The names of registers are different
4871 for each machine; use @code{info registers} to see the names used on
4872 your machine.
4873
4874 @table @code
4875 @item info registers
4876 @kindex info registers
4877 Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
4878 registers (in the selected stack frame).
4879
4880 @item info all-registers
4881 @kindex info all-registers
4882 @cindex floating point registers
4883 Print the names and values of all registers, including floating-point
4884 registers.
4885
4886 @item info registers @var{regname} @dots{}
4887 Print the relativized value of each specified register @var{regname}.
4888 @var{regname} may be any register name valid on the machine you are using, with
4889 or without the initial @samp{$}.
4890 @end table
4891
4892 @value{GDBN} has four ``standard'' register names that are available (in
4893 expressions) on most machines---whenever they do not conflict with an
4894 architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers. The register names
4895 @code{$pc} and @code{$sp} are used for the program counter register and
4896 the stack pointer. @code{$fp} is used for a register that contains a
4897 pointer to the current stack frame, and @code{$ps} is used for a
4898 register that contains the processor status. For example,
4899 you could print the program counter in hex with
4900
4901 @example
4902 p/x $pc
4903 @end example
4904
4905 @noindent
4906 or print the instruction to be executed next with
4907
4908 @example
4909 x/i $pc
4910 @end example
4911
4912 @noindent
4913 or add four to the stack pointer@footnote{This is a way of removing
4914 one word from the stack, on machines where stacks grow downward in
4915 memory (most machines, nowadays). This assumes that the innermost
4916 stack frame is selected; setting @code{$sp} is not allowed when other
4917 stack frames are selected. To pop entire frames off the stack,
4918 regardless of machine architecture, use @code{return};
4919 @pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}.} with
4920
4921 @example
4922 set $sp += 4
4923 @end example
4924
4925 Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available on
4926 your machine even though the machine has different canonical mnemonics,
4927 so long as there is no conflict. The @code{info registers} command
4928 shows the canonical names. For example, on the SPARC, @code{info
4929 registers} displays the processor status register as @code{$psr} but you
4930 can also refer to it as @code{$ps}.
4931
4932 @value{GDBN} always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
4933 integer when the register is examined in this way. Some machines have
4934 special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
4935 registers are considered to have floating point values. There is no way
4936 to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
4937 (although you can @emph{print} it as a floating point value with
4938 @samp{print/f $@var{regname}}).
4939
4940 Some registers have distinct ``raw'' and ``virtual'' data formats. This
4941 means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
4942 the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
4943 sees. For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
4944 coprocessor are always saved in ``extended'' (raw) format, but all C
4945 programs expect to work with ``double'' (virtual) format. In such
4946 cases, @value{GDBN} normally works with the virtual format only (the format that
4947 makes sense for your program), but the @code{info registers} command
4948 prints the data in both formats.
4949
4950 Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
4951 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). This means that you get the
4952 value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
4953 were exited and their saved registers restored. In order to see the
4954 true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
4955 frame (with @samp{frame 0}).
4956
4957 However, @value{GDBN} must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
4958 code generated by your compiler. If some registers are not saved, or if
4959 @value{GDBN} is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack
4960 frame makes no difference.
4961
4962 @ifset AMD29K
4963 @table @code
4964 @item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
4965 @kindex set rstack_high_address
4966 @cindex AMD 29K register stack
4967 @cindex register stack, AMD29K
4968 On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
4969 ``register stack''. There is no way for @value{GDBN} to determine the extent
4970 of this stack. Normally, @value{GDBN} just assumes that the stack is ``large
4971 enough''. This may result in @value{GDBN} referencing memory locations that
4972 do not exist. If necessary, you can get around this problem by
4973 specifying the ending address of the register stack with the @code{set
4974 rstack_high_address} command. The argument should be an address, which
4975 you probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
4976 hexadecimal.
4977
4978 @item show rstack_high_address
4979 @kindex show rstack_high_address
4980 Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
4981 processors.
4982 @end table
4983 @end ifset
4984
4985 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
4986 @node Floating Point Hardware
4987 @section Floating point hardware
4988 @cindex floating point
4989
4990 Depending on the configuration, @value{GDBN} may be able to give
4991 you more information about the status of the floating point hardware.
4992
4993 @table @code
4994 @item info float
4995 @kindex info float
4996 Display hardware-dependent information about the floating
4997 point unit. The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
4998 floating point chip; on some platforms, @samp{info float} is not
4999 available at all.
5000 @end table
5001 @c FIXME: this is a cop-out. Try to get examples, explanations. Only
5002 @c FIXME...supported currently on arm's and 386's. Mark properly with
5003 @c FIXME... m4 macros to isolate general statements from hardware-dep,
5004 @c FIXME... at that point.
5005 @end ifclear
5006
5007 @ifclear CONLY
5008 @node Languages
5009 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages
5010 @cindex languages
5011
5012 @ifset MOD2
5013 Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
5014 rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
5015 dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
5016 Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}. Values can also be
5017 represented (and displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C are written
5018 like @samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
5019 @end ifset
5020
5021 @cindex working language
5022 Language-specific information is built into @value{GDBN} for some languages,
5023 allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
5024 native language, and allowing @value{GDBN} to output values in a manner
5025 consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
5026 language you use to build expressions, called the @dfn{working
5027 language}, can be selected manually, or @value{GDBN} can set it
5028 automatically.
5029
5030 @menu
5031 * Setting:: Switching between source languages
5032 * Show:: Displaying the language
5033 @ifset MOD2
5034 * Checks:: Type and range checks
5035 @end ifset
5036
5037 * Support:: Supported languages
5038 @end menu
5039
5040 @node Setting
5041 @section Switching between source languages
5042
5043 There are two ways to control the working language---either have @value{GDBN}
5044 set it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the
5045 @code{set language} command for either purpose. On startup, @value{GDBN}
5046 defaults to setting the language automatically. The working language is
5047 used to determine how expressions you type are interpreted, how values
5048 are printed, etc.
5049
5050 In addition to the working language, every source file which
5051 @value{GDBN} knows about has its own working language. For some object
5052 file formats, the compiler might indicate which language a particular
5053 source file was in, but most of the time @value{GDBN} infers the
5054 language from the name of the file. The language of a source file
5055 controls whether C++ names are demangled---this way @code{backtrace} can
5056 show each frame appropriately for its own language. There is no way to
5057 set the language of a source file from within @value{GDBN}---the most
5058 common case where this is a problem is if you are using a program, such
5059 as @code{cfront} or @code{f2c}, which generates C but for which the real
5060 source code is in fact in another language. In that case, make the
5061 program use @code{#line} directives in its C output; that way
5062 @value{GDBN} will not only know the correct language, it will also be
5063 able to display the source code of the original program, not the
5064 generated C code.
5065
5066 @menu
5067 * Filenames:: Filename extensions and languages.
5068 * Manually:: Setting the working language manually
5069 * Automatically:: Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
5070 @end menu
5071
5072 @node Filenames
5073 @subsection List of filename extensions and languages
5074
5075 If a source file name ends in one of the following extensions, then
5076 @value{GDBN} infers that its language is the one indicated.
5077
5078 @table @file
5079 @ifset MOD2
5080 @item .mod
5081 Modula-2 source file
5082 @end ifset
5083
5084 @item .c
5085 C source file
5086
5087 @item .C
5088 @itemx .cc
5089 @itemx .cxx
5090 @itemx .cpp
5091 @itemx .cp
5092 @itemx .c++
5093 C++ source file
5094
5095 @item .ch
5096 @itemx .c186
5097 @itemx .c286
5098 CHILL source file.
5099
5100 @item .s
5101 @itemx .S
5102 Assembler source file. This actually behaves almost like C, but
5103 @value{GDBN} does not skip over function prologues when stepping.
5104 @end table
5105
5106 @node Manually
5107 @subsection Setting the working language
5108
5109 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically,
5110 expressions are interpreted the same way in your debugging session and
5111 your program.
5112
5113 @kindex set language
5114 If you wish, you may set the language manually. To do this, issue the
5115 command @samp{set language @var{lang}}, where @var{lang} is the name of
5116 a language, such as
5117 @ifclear MOD2
5118 @code{c}.
5119 @end ifclear
5120 @ifset MOD2
5121 @code{c} or @code{modula-2}.
5122 @end ifset
5123 For a list of the supported languages, type @samp{set language}.
5124 @c FIXME: rms: eventually this command should be "help set language".
5125
5126 @ifset MOD2
5127 Setting the language manually prevents @value{GDBN} from updating the working
5128 language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try
5129 to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
5130 source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
5131 languages---but means different things. For instance, if the current
5132 source file were written in C, and @value{GDBN} was parsing Modula-2, a
5133 command such as:
5134
5135 @example
5136 print a = b + c
5137 @end example
5138
5139 @noindent
5140 might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add
5141 @code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}. The result
5142 printed would be the value of @code{a}. In Modula-2, this means to compare
5143 @code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
5144 @end ifset
5145
5146 @node Automatically
5147 @subsection Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
5148
5149 To have @value{GDBN} set the working language automatically, use
5150 @samp{set language local} or @samp{set language auto}. @value{GDBN}
5151 then infers the working language. That is, when your program stops in a
5152 frame (usually by encountering a breakpoint), @value{GDBN} sets the
5153 working language to the language recorded for the function in that
5154 frame. If the language for a frame is unknown (that is, if the function
5155 or block corresponding to the frame was defined in a source file that
5156 does not have a recognized extension), the current working language is
5157 not changed, and @value{GDBN} issues a warning.
5158
5159 This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
5160 entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
5161 written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
5162 a different source language. Using @samp{set language auto} in this
5163 case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
5164
5165 @node Show
5166 @section Displaying the language
5167
5168 The following commands help you find out which language is the
5169 working language, and also what language source files were written in.
5170
5171 @kindex show language
5172 @kindex info frame
5173 @kindex info source
5174 @table @code
5175 @item show language
5176 Display the current working language. This is the
5177 language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
5178 build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
5179
5180 @item info frame
5181 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information
5182 about a frame}) is the source language for this frame. This
5183 language becomes the working language if you use an
5184 identifier from this frame.
5185
5186 @item info source
5187 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Symbols, ,Examining the
5188 Symbol Table}) is the source language of this source file.
5189 @end table
5190
5191 @ifset MOD2
5192 @node Checks
5193 @section Type and range checking
5194
5195 @quotation
5196 @emph{Warning:} In this release, the @value{GDBN} commands for type and range
5197 checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
5198 section documents the intended facilities.
5199 @end quotation
5200 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
5201
5202 Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
5203 errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These include
5204 checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
5205 sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such as
5206 these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
5207 by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
5208 errors when your program is running.
5209
5210 @value{GDBN} can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
5211 Although @value{GDBN} does not check the statements in your program, it
5212 can check expressions entered directly into @value{GDBN} for evaluation via
5213 the @code{print} command, for example. As with the working language,
5214 @value{GDBN} can also decide whether or not to check automatically based on
5215 your program's source language. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages},
5216 for the default settings of supported languages.
5217
5218 @menu
5219 * Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
5220 * Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
5221 @end menu
5222
5223 @cindex type checking
5224 @cindex checks, type
5225 @node Type Checking
5226 @subsection An overview of type checking
5227
5228 Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
5229 arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
5230 otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch
5231 errors from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
5232
5233 @example
5234 1 + 2 @result{} 3
5235 @exdent but
5236 @error{} 1 + 2.3
5237 @end example
5238
5239 The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
5240 type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
5241
5242 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell the @value{GDBN}
5243 type checker to skip checking; to treat any mismatches as errors and
5244 abandon the expression; or only issue warnings when type mismatches
5245 occur, but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
5246 these, @value{GDBN} evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
5247 also issues a warning.
5248
5249 Even though you may turn type checking off, other type-based reasons may
5250 prevent @value{GDBN} from evaluating an expression. For instance, @value{GDBN} does not
5251 know how to add an @code{int} and a @code{struct foo}. These particular
5252 type errors have nothing to do with the language in use, and usually
5253 arise from expressions, such as the one described above, which make
5254 little sense to evaluate anyway.
5255
5256 Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
5257 instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
5258 operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
5259 represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
5260 operators. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for further
5261 details on specific languages.
5262
5263 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
5264
5265 @kindex set check
5266 @kindex set check type
5267 @kindex show check type
5268 @table @code
5269 @item set check type auto
5270 Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
5271 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
5272 each language.
5273
5274 @item set check type on
5275 @itemx set check type off
5276 Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
5277 current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
5278 match the language default. If any type mismatches occur in
5279 evaluating an expression while typechecking is on, @value{GDBN} prints a
5280 message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
5281
5282 @item set check type warn
5283 Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
5284 evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still
5285 be impossible for other reasons. For example, @value{GDBN} cannot add
5286 numbers and structures.
5287
5288 @item show type
5289 Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not @value{GDBN} is
5290 setting it automatically.
5291 @end table
5292
5293 @cindex range checking
5294 @cindex checks, range
5295 @node Range Checking
5296 @subsection An overview of range checking
5297
5298 In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
5299 bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
5300 checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
5301 computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
5302 not exceed the bounds of the array.
5303
5304 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell
5305 @value{GDBN} to treat range errors in one of three ways: ignore them,
5306 always treat them as errors and abandon the expression, or issue
5307 warnings but evaluate the expression anyway.
5308
5309 A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
5310 array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member
5311 of any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
5312 error. In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
5313 result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
5314 the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
5315
5316 @example
5317 @var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
5318 @end example
5319
5320 This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
5321 specific to individual compilers or machines. @xref{Support, ,
5322 Supported languages}, for further details on specific languages.
5323
5324 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
5325
5326 @kindex set check
5327 @kindex set check range
5328 @kindex show check range
5329 @table @code
5330 @item set check range auto
5331 Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
5332 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
5333 each language.
5334
5335 @item set check range on
5336 @itemx set check range off
5337 Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
5338 current working language. A warning is issued if the setting does not
5339 match the language default. If a range error occurs, then a message
5340 is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
5341
5342 @item set check range warn
5343 Output messages when the @value{GDBN} range checker detects a range error,
5344 but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
5345 expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
5346 memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many Unix
5347 systems).
5348
5349 @item show range
5350 Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
5351 being set automatically by @value{GDBN}.
5352 @end table
5353 @end ifset
5354
5355 @node Support
5356 @section Supported languages
5357
5358 @ifset MOD2
5359 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, C++, and Modula-2.
5360 @end ifset
5361 @ifclear MOD2
5362 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, and C++.
5363 @end ifclear
5364 Some @value{GDBN} features may be used in expressions regardless of the
5365 language you use: the @value{GDBN} @code{@@} and @code{::} operators,
5366 and the @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions,
5367 ,Expressions}) can be used with the constructs of any supported
5368 language.
5369
5370 The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
5371 supported by @value{GDBN}. These sections are not meant to be language
5372 tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
5373 @value{GDBN} expression parser accepts, and what input and output
5374 formats should look like for different languages. There are many good
5375 books written on each of these languages; please look to these for a
5376 language reference or tutorial.
5377
5378 @ifset MOD2
5379 @menu
5380 * C:: C and C++
5381 * Modula-2:: Modula-2
5382 @end menu
5383
5384 @node C
5385 @subsection C and C++
5386 @cindex C and C++
5387 @cindex expressions in C or C++
5388
5389 Since C and C++ are so closely related, many features of @value{GDBN} apply
5390 to both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss both languages
5391 together.
5392 @end ifset
5393 @ifclear MOD2
5394 @c Cancel this below, under same condition, at end of this chapter!
5395 @raisesections
5396 @end ifclear
5397
5398 @cindex C++
5399 @kindex g++
5400 @cindex GNU C++
5401 The C++ debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the GNU C++
5402 compiler and @value{GDBN}. Therefore, to debug your C++ code
5403 effectively, you must compile your C++ programs with the GNU C++
5404 compiler, @code{g++}.
5405
5406 For best results when debugging C++ programs, use the stabs debugging
5407 format. You can select that format explicitly with the @code{g++}
5408 command-line options @samp{-gstabs} or @samp{-gstabs+}. See
5409 @ref{Debugging Options,,Options for Debugging Your Program or GNU CC,
5410 gcc.info, Using GNU CC}, for more information.
5411 @end ifclear
5412 @ifset CONLY
5413 @node C
5414 @chapter C Language Support
5415 @cindex C language
5416 @cindex expressions in C
5417
5418 Information specific to the C language is built into @value{GDBN} so that you
5419 can use C expressions while degugging. This also permits @value{GDBN} to
5420 output values in a manner consistent with C conventions.
5421
5422 @menu
5423 * C Operators:: C operators
5424 * C Constants:: C constants
5425 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5426 @end menu
5427 @end ifset
5428 @ifclear CONLY
5429 @menu
5430 * C Operators:: C and C++ operators
5431 * C Constants:: C and C++ constants
5432 * Cplus expressions:: C++ expressions
5433 * C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C++
5434 @ifset MOD2
5435 * C Checks:: C and C++ type and range checks
5436 @end ifset
5437
5438 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5439 * Debugging C plus plus:: Special features for C++
5440 @end menu
5441 @end ifclear
5442
5443 @ifclear CONLY
5444 @cindex C and C++ operators
5445 @node C Operators
5446 @subsubsection C and C++ operators
5447 @end ifclear
5448 @ifset CONLY
5449 @cindex C operators
5450 @node C Operators
5451 @section C operators
5452 @end ifset
5453
5454 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5455 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5456 often defined on groups of types.
5457
5458 @ifclear CONLY
5459 For the purposes of C and C++, the following definitions hold:
5460 @end ifclear
5461
5462 @itemize @bullet
5463 @item
5464 @emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
5465 specifiers; @code{char}; and @code{enum}.
5466
5467 @item
5468 @emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float} and @code{double}.
5469
5470 @item
5471 @emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type}
5472 *)}.
5473
5474 @item
5475 @emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
5476 @end itemize
5477
5478 @noindent
5479 The following operators are supported. They are listed here
5480 in order of increasing precedence:
5481
5482 @table @code
5483 @item ,
5484 The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a comma-separated list
5485 are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
5486 expression being the last expression evaluated.
5487
5488 @item =
5489 Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
5490 assigned. Defined on scalar types.
5491
5492 @item @var{op}=
5493 Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
5494 and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
5495 @w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precendence.
5496 @var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
5497 @code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
5498
5499 @item ?:
5500 The ternary operator. @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
5501 of as: if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}. @var{a} should be of an
5502 integral type.
5503
5504 @item ||
5505 Logical @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5506
5507 @item &&
5508 Logical @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5509
5510 @item |
5511 Bitwise @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5512
5513 @item ^
5514 Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5515
5516 @item &
5517 Bitwise @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5518
5519 @item ==@r{, }!=
5520 Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of these
5521 expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
5522
5523 @item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
5524 Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
5525 Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for false
5526 and non-zero for true.
5527
5528 @item <<@r{, }>>
5529 left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
5530
5531 @item @@
5532 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5533
5534 @item +@r{, }-
5535 Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
5536 pointer types.
5537
5538 @item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
5539 Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and division are
5540 defined on integral and floating-point types. Modulus is defined on
5541 integral types.
5542
5543 @item ++@r{, }--
5544 Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
5545 operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
5546 when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
5547 operation takes place.
5548
5549 @item *
5550 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence as
5551 @code{++}.
5552
5553 @item &
5554 Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as @code{++}.
5555
5556 @ifclear CONLY
5557 For debugging C++, @value{GDBN} implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what is
5558 allowed in the C++ language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
5559 (or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}}) to examine the address
5560 where a C++ reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
5561 stored.
5562 @end ifclear
5563
5564 @item -
5565 Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
5566 precedence as @code{++}.
5567
5568 @item !
5569 Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5570 @code{++}.
5571
5572 @item ~
5573 Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5574 @code{++}.
5575
5576
5577 @item .@r{, }->
5578 Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For convenience,
5579 @value{GDBN} regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
5580 pointer based on the stored type information.
5581 Defined on @code{struct} and @code{union} data.
5582
5583 @item []
5584 Array indexing. @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
5585 @code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5586
5587 @item ()
5588 Function parameter list. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5589
5590 @ifclear CONLY
5591 @item ::
5592 C++ scope resolution operator. Defined on
5593 @code{struct}, @code{union}, and @code{class} types.
5594 @end ifclear
5595
5596 @item ::
5597 Doubled colons
5598 @ifclear CONLY
5599 also
5600 @end ifclear
5601 represent the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@pxref{Expressions,
5602 ,Expressions}).
5603 @ifclear CONLY
5604 Same precedence as @code{::}, above.
5605 @end ifclear
5606 @end table
5607
5608 @ifclear CONLY
5609 @cindex C and C++ constants
5610 @node C Constants
5611 @subsubsection C and C++ constants
5612
5613 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C and C++ in the
5614 following ways:
5615 @end ifclear
5616 @ifset CONLY
5617 @cindex C constants
5618 @node C Constants
5619 @section C constants
5620
5621 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C in the
5622 following ways:
5623 @end ifset
5624
5625 @itemize @bullet
5626 @item
5627 Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
5628 specified by a leading @samp{0} (ie. zero), and hexadecimal constants by
5629 a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}. Constants may also end with a letter
5630 @samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
5631 @code{long} value.
5632
5633 @item
5634 Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
5635 point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
5636 exponent. An exponent is of the form:
5637 @samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
5638 sequence of digits. The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
5639
5640 @item
5641 Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
5642 integral equivalents.
5643
5644 @item
5645 Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
5646 (@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
5647 (usually its @sc{ASCII} value). Within quotes, the single character may
5648 be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
5649 the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
5650 of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
5651 @samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
5652 @samp{\n} for newline.
5653
5654 @item
5655 String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded
5656 by double quotes (@code{"}).
5657
5658 @item
5659 Pointer constants are an integral value. You can also write pointers
5660 to constants using the C operator @samp{&}.
5661
5662 @item
5663 Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces @samp{@{}
5664 and @samp{@}}; for example, @samp{@{1,2,3@}} is a three-element array of
5665 integers, @samp{@{@{1,2@}, @{3,4@}, @{5,6@}@}} is a three-by-two array,
5666 and @samp{@{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"@}} is a three-element array of pointers.
5667 @end itemize
5668
5669 @ifclear CONLY
5670 @node Cplus expressions
5671 @subsubsection C++ expressions
5672
5673 @cindex expressions in C++
5674 @value{GDBN} expression handling has a number of extensions to
5675 interpret a significant subset of C++ expressions.
5676
5677 @cindex C++ support, not in @sc{coff}
5678 @cindex @sc{coff} versus C++
5679 @cindex C++ and object formats
5680 @cindex object formats and C++
5681 @cindex a.out and C++
5682 @cindex @sc{ecoff} and C++
5683 @cindex @sc{xcoff} and C++
5684 @cindex @sc{elf}/stabs and C++
5685 @cindex @sc{elf}/@sc{dwarf} and C++
5686 @c FIXME!! GDB may eventually be able to debug C++ using DWARF; check
5687 @c periodically whether this has happened...
5688 @quotation
5689 @emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} can only debug C++ code if you compile with
5690 the GNU C++ compiler. Moreover, C++ debugging depends on the use of
5691 additional debugging information in the symbol table, and thus requires
5692 special support. @value{GDBN} has this support @emph{only} with the
5693 stabs debug format. In particular, if your compiler generates a.out,
5694 MIPS @sc{ecoff}, RS/6000 @sc{xcoff}, or @sc{elf} with stabs extensions
5695 to the symbol table, these facilities are all available. (With GNU CC,
5696 you can use the @samp{-gstabs} option to request stabs debugging
5697 extensions explicitly.) Where the object code format is standard
5698 @sc{coff} or @sc{dwarf} in @sc{elf}, on the other hand, most of the C++
5699 support in @value{GDBN} does @emph{not} work.
5700 @end quotation
5701
5702 @enumerate
5703
5704 @cindex member functions
5705 @item
5706 Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
5707
5708 @example
5709 count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
5710 @end example
5711
5712 @kindex this
5713 @cindex namespace in C++
5714 @item
5715 While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
5716 expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
5717 that is, @value{GDBN} allows implicit references to the class instance
5718 pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C++.
5719
5720 @cindex call overloaded functions
5721 @cindex type conversions in C++
5722 @item
5723 You can call overloaded functions; @value{GDBN} resolves the function
5724 call to the right definition, with one restriction---you must use
5725 arguments of the type required by the function that you want to call.
5726 @value{GDBN} does not perform conversions requiring constructors or
5727 user-defined type operators.
5728
5729 @cindex reference declarations
5730 @item
5731 @value{GDBN} understands variables declared as C++ references; you can use them in
5732 expressions just as you do in C++ source---they are automatically
5733 dereferenced.
5734
5735 In the parameter list shown when @value{GDBN} displays a frame, the values of
5736 reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
5737 avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
5738 The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
5739 you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
5740
5741 @item
5742 @value{GDBN} supports the C++ name resolution operator @code{::}---your
5743 expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do. Since
5744 one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
5745 necessary, for example in an expression like
5746 @samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}. @value{GDBN} also allows
5747 resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C++
5748 debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program variables}).
5749 @end enumerate
5750
5751 @node C Defaults
5752 @subsubsection C and C++ defaults
5753 @cindex C and C++ defaults
5754
5755 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set type and range checking automatically, they
5756 both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
5757 C or C++. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
5758 selected the working language.
5759
5760 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, it sets the
5761 working language to C or C++ on entering code compiled from a source file
5762 whose name ends with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or @file{.cc}.
5763 @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language}, for
5764 further details.
5765
5766 @ifset MOD2
5767 @c Type checking is (a) primarily motivated by Modula-2, and (b)
5768 @c unimplemented. If (b) changes, it might make sense to let this node
5769 @c appear even if Mod-2 does not, but meanwhile ignore it. pesch 16jul93.
5770 @node C Checks
5771 @subsubsection C and C++ type and range checks
5772 @cindex C and C++ checks
5773
5774 By default, when @value{GDBN} parses C or C++ expressions, type checking
5775 is not used. However, if you turn type checking on, @value{GDBN}
5776 considers two variables type equivalent if:
5777
5778 @itemize @bullet
5779 @item
5780 The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
5781 enumerated tag.
5782
5783 @item
5784 Two two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
5785 declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
5786
5787 @ignore
5788 @c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
5789 @c FIXME--beers?
5790 @item
5791 The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
5792 declared in the same declaration. (Note: this may not be true for all C
5793 compilers.)
5794 @end ignore
5795 @end itemize
5796
5797 Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations. Array
5798 indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
5799 that is not itself an array.
5800 @end ifset
5801 @end ifclear
5802
5803 @ifclear CONLY
5804 @node Debugging C
5805 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and C
5806 @end ifclear
5807 @ifset CONLY
5808 @node Debugging C
5809 @section @value{GDBN} and C
5810 @end ifset
5811
5812 The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
5813 the @code{union} type. When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
5814 inside a @code{struct}
5815 @ifclear CONLY
5816 or @code{class}
5817 @end ifclear
5818 is also printed.
5819 Otherwise, it appears as @samp{@{...@}}.
5820
5821 The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
5822 with pointers and a memory allocation function. @xref{Expressions,
5823 ,Expressions}.
5824
5825 @ifclear CONLY
5826 @node Debugging C plus plus
5827 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} features for C++
5828
5829 @cindex commands for C++
5830 Some @value{GDBN} commands are particularly useful with C++, and some are
5831 designed specifically for use with C++. Here is a summary:
5832
5833 @table @code
5834 @cindex break in overloaded functions
5835 @item @r{breakpoint menus}
5836 When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
5837 @value{GDBN} breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
5838 you want. @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}.
5839
5840 @cindex overloading in C++
5841 @item rbreak @var{regex}
5842 Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
5843 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
5844 classes.
5845 @xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}.
5846
5847 @cindex C++ exception handling
5848 @item catch @var{exceptions}
5849 @itemx info catch
5850 Debug C++ exception handling using these commands. @xref{Exception
5851 Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
5852
5853 @cindex inheritance
5854 @item ptype @var{typename}
5855 Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
5856 @var{typename}.
5857 @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
5858
5859 @cindex C++ symbol display
5860 @item set print demangle
5861 @itemx show print demangle
5862 @itemx set print asm-demangle
5863 @itemx show print asm-demangle
5864 Control whether C++ symbols display in their source form, both when
5865 displaying code as C++ source and when displaying disassemblies.
5866 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5867
5868 @item set print object
5869 @itemx show print object
5870 Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
5871 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5872
5873 @item set print vtbl
5874 @itemx show print vtbl
5875 Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
5876 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5877
5878 @item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
5879 You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
5880 the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in C++: type
5881 @code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}. You can
5882 also use the @value{GDBN} command-line word completion facilities to list the
5883 available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
5884 @xref{Completion,, Command completion}, for details on how to do this.
5885 @end table
5886 @ifclear MOD2
5887 @c cancels "raisesections" under same conditions near bgn of chapter
5888 @lowersections
5889 @end ifclear
5890
5891 @ifset MOD2
5892 @node Modula-2
5893 @subsection Modula-2
5894 @cindex Modula-2
5895
5896 The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Modula-2 only support
5897 output from the GNU Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being
5898 developed). Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and
5899 attempting to debug executables produced by them is most likely
5900 to give an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
5901 table.
5902
5903 @cindex expressions in Modula-2
5904 @menu
5905 * M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
5906 * Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in functions and procedures
5907 * M2 Constants:: Modula-2 constants
5908 * M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
5909 * Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
5910 * M2 Checks:: Modula-2 type and range checks
5911 * M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5912 * GDB/M2:: @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
5913 @end menu
5914
5915 @node M2 Operators
5916 @subsubsection Operators
5917 @cindex Modula-2 operators
5918
5919 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5920 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5921 often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
5922 following definitions hold:
5923
5924 @itemize @bullet
5925
5926 @item
5927 @emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
5928 their subranges.
5929
5930 @item
5931 @emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
5932
5933 @item
5934 @emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
5935
5936 @item
5937 @emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
5938 @var{type}}.
5939
5940 @item
5941 @emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
5942
5943 @item
5944 @emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET} and @code{BITSET} types.
5945
5946 @item
5947 @emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
5948 @end itemize
5949
5950 @noindent
5951 The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
5952 increasing precedence:
5953
5954 @table @code
5955 @item ,
5956 Function argument or array index separator.
5957
5958 @item :=
5959 Assignment. The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
5960 @var{value}.
5961
5962 @item <@r{, }>
5963 Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
5964 types.
5965
5966 @item <=@r{, }>=
5967 Less than, greater than, less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
5968 on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
5969 set types. Same precedence as @code{<}.
5970
5971 @item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
5972 Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
5973 Same precedence as @code{<}. In @value{GDBN} scripts, only @code{<>} is
5974 available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
5975 comment character.
5976
5977 @item IN
5978 Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their members.
5979 Same precedence as @code{<}.
5980
5981 @item OR
5982 Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
5983
5984 @item AND@r{, }&
5985 Boolean conjuction. Defined on boolean types.
5986
5987 @item @@
5988 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5989
5990 @item +@r{, }-
5991 Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
5992 and difference on set types.
5993
5994 @item *
5995 Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
5996 on set types.
5997
5998 @item /
5999 Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
6000 types. Same precedence as @code{*}.
6001
6002 @item DIV@r{, }MOD
6003 Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
6004 precedence as @code{*}.
6005
6006 @item -
6007 Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER} and @code{REAL} data.
6008
6009 @item ^
6010 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
6011
6012 @item NOT
6013 Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
6014 @code{^}.
6015
6016 @item .
6017 @code{RECORD} field selector. Defined on @code{RECORD} data. Same
6018 precedence as @code{^}.
6019
6020 @item []
6021 Array indexing. Defined on @code{ARRAY} data. Same precedence as @code{^}.
6022
6023 @item ()
6024 Procedure argument list. Defined on @code{PROCEDURE} objects. Same precedence
6025 as @code{^}.
6026
6027 @item ::@r{, }.
6028 @value{GDBN} and Modula-2 scope operators.
6029 @end table
6030
6031 @quotation
6032 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so @value{GDBN}
6033 treats the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
6034 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
6035 @code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
6036 @end quotation
6037
6038 @cindex Modula-2 built-ins
6039 @node Built-In Func/Proc
6040 @subsubsection Built-in functions and procedures
6041
6042 Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
6043 In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
6044
6045 @table @var
6046
6047 @item a
6048 represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
6049
6050 @item c
6051 represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
6052
6053 @item i
6054 represents a variable or constant of integral type.
6055
6056 @item m
6057 represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in the
6058 same function with the metavariable @var{s}. The type of @var{s} should
6059 be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}).
6060
6061 @item n
6062 represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
6063
6064 @item r
6065 represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
6066
6067 @item t
6068 represents a type.
6069
6070 @item v
6071 represents a variable.
6072
6073 @item x
6074 represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
6075 explanation of the function for details.
6076 @end table
6077
6078 All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
6079
6080 @table @code
6081 @item ABS(@var{n})
6082 Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
6083
6084 @item CAP(@var{c})
6085 If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
6086 equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument
6087
6088 @item CHR(@var{i})
6089 Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
6090
6091 @item DEC(@var{v})
6092 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
6093
6094 @item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
6095 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
6096 new value.
6097
6098 @item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
6099 Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}. Returns the new
6100 set.
6101
6102 @item FLOAT(@var{i})
6103 Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
6104
6105 @item HIGH(@var{a})
6106 Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
6107
6108 @item INC(@var{v})
6109 Increments the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
6110
6111 @item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
6112 Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
6113 new value.
6114
6115 @item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
6116 Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
6117 there. Returns the new set.
6118
6119 @item MAX(@var{t})
6120 Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
6121
6122 @item MIN(@var{t})
6123 Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
6124
6125 @item ODD(@var{i})
6126 Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
6127
6128 @item ORD(@var{x})
6129 Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the ordinal
6130 value of a character is its ASCII value (on machines supporting the
6131 ASCII character set). @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
6132 integral, character and enumerated types.
6133
6134 @item SIZE(@var{x})
6135 Returns the size of its argument. @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
6136
6137 @item TRUNC(@var{r})
6138 Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
6139
6140 @item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
6141 Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
6142 @end table
6143
6144 @quotation
6145 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
6146 @value{GDBN} treats the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
6147 an error.
6148 @end quotation
6149
6150 @cindex Modula-2 constants
6151 @node M2 Constants
6152 @subsubsection Constants
6153
6154 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
6155 ways:
6156
6157 @itemize @bullet
6158
6159 @item
6160 Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
6161 expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
6162 rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
6163 trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
6164
6165 @item
6166 Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
6167 decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional exponent can
6168 then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
6169 @samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent. All of the
6170 digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
6171 digits.
6172
6173 @item
6174 Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
6175 like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}). They may
6176 also be expressed by their ordinal value (their ASCII value, usually)
6177 followed by a @samp{C}.
6178
6179 @item
6180 String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
6181 pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
6182 Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed. @xref{C
6183 Constants, ,C and C++ constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
6184 sequences.
6185
6186 @item
6187 Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
6188
6189 @item
6190 Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
6191 @code{FALSE}.
6192
6193 @item
6194 Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
6195
6196 @item
6197 Set constants are not yet supported.
6198 @end itemize
6199
6200 @node M2 Defaults
6201 @subsubsection Modula-2 defaults
6202 @cindex Modula-2 defaults
6203
6204 If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
6205 both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
6206 Modula-2. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
6207 selected the working language.
6208
6209 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
6210 code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} sets the
6211 working language to Modula-2. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
6212 the language automatically}, for further details.
6213
6214 @node Deviations
6215 @subsubsection Deviations from standard Modula-2
6216 @cindex Modula-2, deviations from
6217
6218 A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
6219 This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
6220
6221 @itemize @bullet
6222 @item
6223 Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
6224 integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
6225 debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
6226 pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
6227 through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
6228 returned a pointer.)
6229
6230 @item
6231 C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
6232 non-printable characters. @value{GDBN} prints out strings with these
6233 escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters are
6234 printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
6235
6236 @item
6237 The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
6238 argument.
6239
6240 @item
6241 All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
6242 @end itemize
6243
6244 @node M2 Checks
6245 @subsubsection Modula-2 type and range checks
6246 @cindex Modula-2 checks
6247
6248 @quotation
6249 @emph{Warning:} in this release, @value{GDBN} does not yet perform type or
6250 range checking.
6251 @end quotation
6252 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
6253
6254 @value{GDBN} considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
6255
6256 @itemize @bullet
6257 @item
6258 They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
6259 @var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
6260
6261 @item
6262 They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of the
6263 GNU Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
6264 @end itemize
6265
6266 As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
6267 whose types are not equivalent is an error.
6268
6269 Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
6270 index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
6271
6272 @node M2 Scope
6273 @subsubsection The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
6274 @cindex scope
6275 @kindex .
6276 @cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
6277 @ifinfo
6278 @kindex colon-colon
6279 @c Info cannot handle :: but TeX can.
6280 @end ifinfo
6281 @iftex
6282 @kindex ::
6283 @end iftex
6284
6285 There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
6286 (@code{.}) and the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@code{::}). The two have
6287 similar syntax:
6288
6289 @example
6290
6291 @var{module} . @var{id}
6292 @var{scope} :: @var{id}
6293 @end example
6294
6295 @noindent
6296 where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
6297 @var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
6298 identifier within your program, except another module.
6299
6300 Using the @code{::} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the scope
6301 specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}. If it is not
6302 found in the specified scope, then @value{GDBN} searches all scopes
6303 enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
6304
6305 Using the @code{.} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the current scope for
6306 the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
6307 definition module specified by @var{module}. With this operator, it is
6308 an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
6309 module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
6310 @var{module}.
6311
6312 @node GDB/M2
6313 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
6314
6315 Some @value{GDBN} commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
6316 Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
6317 specifically to C and C++: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
6318 @samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}. The first four
6319 apply to C++, and the last to the C @code{union} type, which has no direct
6320 analogue in Modula-2.
6321
6322 The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
6323 while using any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its
6324 intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
6325 created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C++. However, because an
6326 address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
6327 @samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful. (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions})
6328
6329 @cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
6330 In @value{GDBN} scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
6331 interpreted as the beginning of a comment. Use @code{<>} instead.
6332
6333 @end ifset
6334 @end ifclear
6335
6336 @node Symbols
6337 @chapter Examining the Symbol Table
6338
6339 The commands described in this section allow you to inquire about the
6340 symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
6341 program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
6342 does not change as your program executes. @value{GDBN} finds it in your
6343 program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started @value{GDBN}
6344 (@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing files}), or by one of the
6345 file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
6346
6347 @c FIXME! This might be intentionally specific to C and C++; if so, move
6348 @c to someplace in C section of lang chapter.
6349 @cindex symbol names
6350 @cindex names of symbols
6351 @cindex quoting names
6352 Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
6353 characters, which @value{GDBN} ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The
6354 most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
6355 source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program variables}). File names
6356 are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but @value{GDBN} would
6357 ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
6358 @samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}. To allow @value{GDBN} to recognize
6359 @samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
6360
6361 @example
6362 p 'foo.c'::x
6363 @end example
6364
6365 @noindent
6366 looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
6367
6368 @table @code
6369 @item info address @var{symbol}
6370 @kindex info address
6371 Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored. For a register
6372 variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a non-register
6373 local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
6374 is always stored.
6375
6376 Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
6377 at all for a register variable, and for a stack local variable prints
6378 the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
6379
6380 @item whatis @var{exp}
6381 @kindex whatis
6382 Print the data type of expression @var{exp}. @var{exp} is not
6383 actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
6384 assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.
6385 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
6386
6387 @item whatis
6388 Print the data type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
6389
6390 @item ptype @var{typename}
6391 @kindex ptype
6392 Print a description of data type @var{typename}. @var{typename} may be
6393 the name of a type, or for C code it may have the form
6394 @ifclear CONLY
6395 @samp{class @var{class-name}},
6396 @end ifclear
6397 @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union @var{union-tag}} or
6398 @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
6399
6400 @item ptype @var{exp}
6401 @itemx ptype
6402 Print a description of the type of expression @var{exp}. @code{ptype}
6403 differs from @code{whatis} by printing a detailed description, instead
6404 of just the name of the type.
6405
6406 For example, for this variable declaration:
6407
6408 @example
6409 struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
6410 @end example
6411
6412 @noindent
6413 the two commands give this output:
6414
6415 @example
6416 @group
6417 (@value{GDBP}) whatis v
6418 type = struct complex
6419 (@value{GDBP}) ptype v
6420 type = struct complex @{
6421 double real;
6422 double imag;
6423 @}
6424 @end group
6425 @end example
6426
6427 @noindent
6428 As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
6429 the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
6430
6431 @item info types @var{regexp}
6432 @itemx info types
6433 @kindex info types
6434 Print a brief description of all types whose name matches @var{regexp}
6435 (or all types in your program, if you supply no argument). Each
6436 complete typename is matched as though it were a complete line; thus,
6437 @samp{i type value} gives information on all types in your program whose
6438 name includes the string @code{value}, but @samp{i type ^value$} gives
6439 information only on types whose complete name is @code{value}.
6440
6441 This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
6442 @code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
6443 lists all source files where a type is defined.
6444
6445 @item info source
6446 @kindex info source
6447 Show the name of the current source file---that is, the source file for
6448 the function containing the current point of execution---and the language
6449 it was written in.
6450
6451 @item info sources
6452 @kindex info sources
6453 Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
6454 debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
6455 have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
6456
6457 @item info functions
6458 @kindex info functions
6459 Print the names and data types of all defined functions.
6460
6461 @item info functions @var{regexp}
6462 Print the names and data types of all defined functions
6463 whose names contain a match for regular expression @var{regexp}.
6464 Thus, @samp{info fun step} finds all functions whose names
6465 include @code{step}; @samp{info fun ^step} finds those whose names
6466 start with @code{step}.
6467
6468 @item info variables
6469 @kindex info variables
6470 Print the names and data types of all variables that are declared
6471 outside of functions (i.e., excluding local variables).
6472
6473 @item info variables @var{regexp}
6474 Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
6475 variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
6476 @var{regexp}.
6477
6478 @ignore
6479 This was never implemented.
6480 @item info methods
6481 @itemx info methods @var{regexp}
6482 @kindex info methods
6483 The @code{info methods} command permits the user to examine all defined
6484 methods within C++ program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
6485 specific set of methods found in the various C++ classes. Many
6486 C++ classes provide a large number of methods. Thus, the output
6487 from the @code{ptype} command can be overwhelming and hard to use. The
6488 @code{info-methods} command filters the methods, printing only those
6489 which match the regular-expression @var{regexp}.
6490 @end ignore
6491
6492 @item maint print symbols @var{filename}
6493 @itemx maint print psymbols @var{filename}
6494 @itemx maint print msymbols @var{filename}
6495 @kindex maint print symbols
6496 @cindex symbol dump
6497 @kindex maint print psymbols
6498 @cindex partial symbol dump
6499 Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file @var{filename}.
6500 These commands are used to debug the @value{GDBN} symbol-reading code. Only
6501 symbols with debugging data are included. If you use @samp{maint print
6502 symbols}, @value{GDBN} includes all the symbols for which it has already
6503 collected full details: that is, @var{filename} reflects symbols for
6504 only those files whose symbols @value{GDBN} has read. You can use the
6505 command @code{info sources} to find out which files these are. If you
6506 use @samp{maint print psymbols} instead, the dump shows information about
6507 symbols that @value{GDBN} only knows partially---that is, symbols defined in
6508 files that @value{GDBN} has skimmed, but not yet read completely. Finally,
6509 @samp{maint print msymbols} dumps just the minimal symbol information
6510 required for each object file from which @value{GDBN} has read some symbols.
6511 @xref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}, for a discussion of how
6512 @value{GDBN} reads symbols (in the description of @code{symbol-file}).
6513 @end table
6514
6515 @node Altering
6516 @chapter Altering Execution
6517
6518 Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want to
6519 find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would lead to
6520 correct results in the rest of the run. You can find the answer by
6521 experiment, using the @value{GDBN} features for altering execution of the
6522 program.
6523
6524 For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
6525 locations,
6526 @ifclear BARETARGET
6527 give your program a signal, restart it
6528 @end ifclear
6529 @ifset BARETARGET
6530 restart your program
6531 @end ifset
6532 at a different address, or even return prematurely from a function to
6533 its caller.
6534
6535 @menu
6536 * Assignment:: Assignment to variables
6537 * Jumping:: Continuing at a different address
6538 @ifclear BARETARGET
6539 * Signaling:: Giving your program a signal
6540 @end ifclear
6541
6542 * Returning:: Returning from a function
6543 * Calling:: Calling your program's functions
6544 * Patching:: Patching your program
6545 @end menu
6546
6547 @node Assignment
6548 @section Assignment to variables
6549
6550 @cindex assignment
6551 @cindex setting variables
6552 To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
6553 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}. For example,
6554
6555 @example
6556 print x=4
6557 @end example
6558
6559 @noindent
6560 stores the value 4 into the variable @code{x}, and then prints the
6561 value of the assignment expression (which is 4).
6562 @ifclear CONLY
6563 @xref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages}, for more
6564 information on operators in supported languages.
6565 @end ifclear
6566
6567 @kindex set variable
6568 @cindex variables, setting
6569 If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use the
6570 @code{set} command instead of the @code{print} command. @code{set} is
6571 really the same as @code{print} except that the expression's value is
6572 not printed and is not put in the value history (@pxref{Value History,
6573 ,Value history}). The expression is evaluated only for its effects.
6574
6575 If the beginning of the argument string of the @code{set} command
6576 appears identical to a @code{set} subcommand, use the @code{set
6577 variable} command instead of just @code{set}. This command is identical
6578 to @code{set} except for its lack of subcommands. For example, if
6579 your program has a variable @code{width}, you get
6580 an error if you try to set a new value with just @samp{set width=13},
6581 because @value{GDBN} has the command @code{set width}:
6582
6583 @example
6584 (@value{GDBP}) whatis width
6585 type = double
6586 (@value{GDBP}) p width
6587 $4 = 13
6588 (@value{GDBP}) set width=47
6589 Invalid syntax in expression.
6590 @end example
6591
6592 @noindent
6593 The invalid expression, of course, is @samp{=47}. In
6594 order to actually set the program's variable @code{width}, use
6595
6596 @example
6597 (@value{GDBP}) set var width=47
6598 @end example
6599
6600 @value{GDBN} allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
6601 freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
6602 and you can convert any structure to any other structure that is the
6603 same length or shorter.
6604 @comment FIXME: how do structs align/pad in these conversions?
6605 @comment /pesch@cygnus.com 18dec1990
6606
6607 To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the @samp{@{@dots{}@}}
6608 construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
6609 (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). For example, @code{@{int@}0x83040} refers
6610 to memory location @code{0x83040} as an integer (which implies a certain size
6611 and representation in memory), and
6612
6613 @example
6614 set @{int@}0x83040 = 4
6615 @end example
6616
6617 @noindent
6618 stores the value 4 into that memory location.
6619
6620 @node Jumping
6621 @section Continuing at a different address
6622
6623 Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
6624 it stopped, with the @code{continue} command. You can instead continue at
6625 an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:
6626
6627 @table @code
6628 @item jump @var{linespec}
6629 @kindex jump
6630 Resume execution at line @var{linespec}. Execution stops again
6631 immediately if there is a breakpoint there. @xref{List, ,Printing
6632 source lines}, for a description of the different forms of
6633 @var{linespec}.
6634
6635 The @code{jump} command does not change the current stack frame, or
6636 the stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
6637 register other than the program counter. If line @var{linespec} is in
6638 a different function from the one currently executing, the results may
6639 be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of arguments or
6640 of local variables. For this reason, the @code{jump} command requests
6641 confirmation if the specified line is not in the function currently
6642 executing. However, even bizarre results are predictable if you are
6643 well acquainted with the machine-language code of your program.
6644
6645 @item jump *@var{address}
6646 Resume execution at the instruction at address @var{address}.
6647 @end table
6648
6649 You can get much the same effect as the @code{jump} command by storing a
6650 new value into the register @code{$pc}. The difference is that this
6651 does not start your program running; it only changes the address where it
6652 @emph{will} run when you continue. For example,
6653
6654 @example
6655 set $pc = 0x485
6656 @end example
6657
6658 @noindent
6659 makes the next @code{continue} command or stepping command execute at
6660 address @code{0x485}, rather than at the address where your program stopped.
6661 @xref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}.
6662
6663 The most common occasion to use the @code{jump} command is to back up,
6664 perhaps with more breakpoints set, over a portion of a program that has
6665 already executed, in order to examine its execution in more detail.
6666
6667 @ifclear BARETARGET
6668 @c @group
6669 @node Signaling
6670 @section Giving your program a signal
6671
6672 @table @code
6673 @item signal @var{signal}
6674 @kindex signal
6675 Resume execution where your program stopped, but immediately give it the
6676 signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the name or the number of a
6677 signal. For example, on many systems @code{signal 2} and @code{signal
6678 SIGINT} are both ways of sending an interrupt signal.
6679
6680 Alternatively, if @var{signal} is zero, continue execution without
6681 giving a signal. This is useful when your program stopped on account of
6682 a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed with the
6683 @code{continue} command; @samp{signal 0} causes it to resume without a
6684 signal.
6685
6686 @code{signal} does not repeat when you press @key{RET} a second time
6687 after executing the command.
6688 @end table
6689 @c @end group
6690
6691 Invoking the @code{signal} command is not the same as invoking the
6692 @code{kill} utility from the shell. Sending a signal with @code{kill}
6693 causes @value{GDBN} to decide what to do with the signal depending on
6694 the signal handling tables (@pxref{Signals}). The @code{signal} command
6695 passes the signal directly to your program.
6696
6697 @end ifclear
6698
6699 @node Returning
6700 @section Returning from a function
6701
6702 @table @code
6703 @item return
6704 @itemx return @var{expression}
6705 @cindex returning from a function
6706 @kindex return
6707 You can cancel execution of a function call with the @code{return}
6708 command. If you give an
6709 @var{expression} argument, its value is used as the function's return
6710 value.
6711 @end table
6712
6713 When you use @code{return}, @value{GDBN} discards the selected stack frame
6714 (and all frames within it). You can think of this as making the
6715 discarded frame return prematurely. If you wish to specify a value to
6716 be returned, give that value as the argument to @code{return}.
6717
6718 This pops the selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a
6719 frame}), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as the
6720 innermost remaining frame. That frame becomes selected. The
6721 specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values
6722 of functions.
6723
6724 The @code{return} command does not resume execution; it leaves the
6725 program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
6726 returned. In contrast, the @code{finish} command (@pxref{Continuing
6727 and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}) resumes execution until the
6728 selected stack frame returns naturally.
6729
6730 @node Calling
6731 @section Calling program functions
6732
6733 @cindex calling functions
6734 @kindex call
6735 @table @code
6736 @item call @var{expr}
6737 Evaluate the expression @var{expr} without displaying @code{void}
6738 returned values.
6739 @end table
6740
6741 You can use this variant of the @code{print} command if you want to
6742 execute a function from your program, but without cluttering the output
6743 with @code{void} returned values. The result is printed and saved in
6744 the value history, if it is not void.
6745
6746 @node Patching
6747 @section Patching programs
6748 @cindex patching binaries
6749 @cindex writing into executables
6750 @ifclear BARETARGET
6751 @cindex writing into corefiles
6752 @end ifclear
6753
6754 By default, @value{GDBN} opens the file containing your program's executable
6755 code
6756 @ifclear BARETARGET
6757 (or the corefile)
6758 @end ifclear
6759 read-only. This prevents accidental alterations
6760 to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally patching
6761 your program's binary.
6762
6763 If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
6764 explicitly with the @code{set write} command. For example, you might
6765 want to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency
6766 repairs.
6767
6768 @table @code
6769 @item set write on
6770 @itemx set write off
6771 @kindex set write
6772 If you specify @samp{set write on}, @value{GDBN} opens executable
6773 @ifclear BARETARGET
6774 and core
6775 @end ifclear
6776 files for both reading and writing; if you specify @samp{set write
6777 off} (the default), @value{GDBN} opens them read-only.
6778
6779 If you have already loaded a file, you must load it again (using the
6780 @code{exec-file}
6781 @ifclear BARETARGET
6782 or @code{core-file}
6783 @end ifclear
6784 command) after changing @code{set write}, for your new setting to take
6785 effect.
6786
6787 @item show write
6788 @kindex show write
6789 Display whether executable files
6790 @ifclear BARETARGET
6791 and core files
6792 @end ifclear
6793 are opened for writing as well as reading.
6794 @end table
6795
6796 @node GDB Files
6797 @chapter @value{GDBN} Files
6798
6799 @value{GDBN} needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged, both in
6800 order to read its symbol table and in order to start your program.
6801 @ifclear BARETARGET
6802 To debug a core dump of a previous run, you must also tell @value{GDBN}
6803 the name of the core dump file.
6804 @end ifclear
6805
6806 @menu
6807 * Files:: Commands to specify files
6808 * Symbol Errors:: Errors reading symbol files
6809 @end menu
6810
6811 @node Files
6812 @section Commands to specify files
6813 @cindex symbol table
6814
6815 @ifclear BARETARGET
6816 @cindex core dump file
6817 The usual way to specify executable and core dump file names is with
6818 the command arguments given when you start @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation,
6819 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6820 @end ifclear
6821 @ifset BARETARGET
6822 The usual way to specify an executable file name is with
6823 the command argument given when you start @value{GDBN}, (@pxref{Invocation,
6824 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6825 @end ifset
6826
6827 Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
6828 @value{GDBN} session. Or you may run @value{GDBN} and forget to specify
6829 a file you want to use. In these situations the @value{GDBN} commands
6830 to specify new files are useful.
6831
6832 @table @code
6833 @item file @var{filename}
6834 @cindex executable file
6835 @kindex file
6836 Use @var{filename} as the program to be debugged. It is read for its
6837 symbols and for the contents of pure memory. It is also the program
6838 executed when you use the @code{run} command. If you do not specify a
6839 directory and the file is not found in the @value{GDBN} working directory, @value{GDBN}
6840 uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of directories to
6841 search, just as the shell does when looking for a program to run. You
6842 can change the value of this variable, for both @value{GDBN} and your program,
6843 using the @code{path} command.
6844
6845 On systems with memory-mapped files, an auxiliary file
6846 @file{@var{filename}.syms} may hold symbol table information for
6847 @var{filename}. If so, @value{GDBN} maps in the symbol table from
6848 @file{@var{filename}.syms}, starting up more quickly. See the
6849 descriptions of the options @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow}
6850 (available on the command line, and with the commands @code{file},
6851 @code{symbol-file}, or @code{add-symbol-file}), for more information.
6852
6853 @item file
6854 @code{file} with no argument makes @value{GDBN} discard any information it
6855 has on both executable file and the symbol table.
6856
6857 @item exec-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6858 @kindex exec-file
6859 Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is found
6860 in @var{filename}. @value{GDBN} searches the environment variable @code{PATH}
6861 if necessary to locate your program. Omitting @var{filename} means to
6862 discard information on the executable file.
6863
6864 @item symbol-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6865 @kindex symbol-file
6866 Read symbol table information from file @var{filename}. @code{PATH} is
6867 searched when necessary. Use the @code{file} command to get both symbol
6868 table and program to run from the same file.
6869
6870 @code{symbol-file} with no argument clears out @value{GDBN} information on your
6871 program's symbol table.
6872
6873 The @code{symbol-file} command causes @value{GDBN} to forget the contents of its
6874 convenience variables, the value history, and all breakpoints and
6875 auto-display expressions. This is because they may contain pointers to
6876 the internal data recording symbols and data types, which are part of
6877 the old symbol table data being discarded inside @value{GDBN}.
6878
6879 @code{symbol-file} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
6880 executing it once.
6881
6882 When @value{GDBN} is configured for a particular environment, it
6883 understands debugging information in whatever format is the standard
6884 generated for that environment; you may use either a GNU compiler, or
6885 other compilers that adhere to the local conventions. Best results are
6886 usually obtained from GNU compilers; for example, using @code{@value{GCC}}
6887 you can generate debugging information for optimized code.
6888
6889 On some kinds of object files, the @code{symbol-file} command does not
6890 normally read the symbol table in full right away. Instead, it scans
6891 the symbol table quickly to find which source files and which symbols
6892 are present. The details are read later, one source file at a time,
6893 as they are needed.
6894
6895 The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make @value{GDBN} start up
6896 faster. For the most part, it is invisible except for occasional
6897 pauses while the symbol table details for a particular source file are
6898 being read. (The @code{set verbose} command can turn these pauses
6899 into messages if desired. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings
6900 and messages}.)
6901
6902 We have not implemented the two-stage strategy for COFF yet. When the
6903 symbol table is stored in COFF format, @code{symbol-file} reads the
6904 symbol table data in full right away.
6905
6906 @item symbol-file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6907 @itemx file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6908 @kindex readnow
6909 @cindex reading symbols immediately
6910 @cindex symbols, reading immediately
6911 @kindex mapped
6912 @cindex memory-mapped symbol file
6913 @cindex saving symbol table
6914 You can override the @value{GDBN} two-stage strategy for reading symbol
6915 tables by using the @samp{-readnow} option with any of the commands that
6916 load symbol table information, if you want to be sure @value{GDBN} has the
6917 entire symbol table available.
6918
6919 @ifclear BARETARGET
6920 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the
6921 @code{mmap} system call, you can use another option, @samp{-mapped}, to
6922 cause @value{GDBN} to write the symbols for your program into a reusable
6923 file. Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions map in symbol information
6924 from this auxiliary symbol file (if the program has not changed), rather
6925 than spending time reading the symbol table from the executable
6926 program. Using the @samp{-mapped} option has the same effect as
6927 starting @value{GDBN} with the @samp{-mapped} command-line option.
6928
6929 You can use both options together, to make sure the auxiliary symbol
6930 file has all the symbol information for your program.
6931
6932 The auxiliary symbol file for a program called @var{myprog} is called
6933 @samp{@var{myprog}.syms}. Once this file exists (so long as it is newer
6934 than the corresponding executable), @value{GDBN} always attempts to use
6935 it when you debug @var{myprog}; no special options or commands are
6936 needed.
6937
6938 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where you run
6939 @value{GDBN}. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN}
6940 symbol table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
6941
6942 @c FIXME: for now no mention of directories, since this seems to be in
6943 @c flux. 13mar1992 status is that in theory GDB would look either in
6944 @c current dir or in same dir as myprog; but issues like competing
6945 @c GDB's, or clutter in system dirs, mean that in practice right now
6946 @c only current dir is used. FFish says maybe a special GDB hierarchy
6947 @c (eg rooted in val of env var GDBSYMS) could exist for mappable symbol
6948 @c files.
6949
6950 @item core-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6951 @kindex core
6952 @kindex core-file
6953 Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the ``contents
6954 of memory''. Traditionally, core files contain only some parts of the
6955 address space of the process that generated them; @value{GDBN} can access the
6956 executable file itself for other parts.
6957
6958 @code{core-file} with no argument specifies that no core file is
6959 to be used.
6960
6961 Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually running
6962 under @value{GDBN}. So, if you have been running your program and you wish to
6963 debug a core file instead, you must kill the subprocess in which the
6964 program is running. To do this, use the @code{kill} command
6965 (@pxref{Kill Process, ,Killing the child process}).
6966 @end ifclear
6967
6968 @item load @var{filename}
6969 @kindex load
6970 @ifset GENERIC
6971 Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
6972 @value{GDBN}, the @code{load} command may be available. Where it exists, it
6973 is meant to make @var{filename} (an executable) available for debugging
6974 on the remote system---by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
6975 @code{load} also records the @var{filename} symbol table in @value{GDBN}, like
6976 the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
6977
6978 If your @value{GDBN} does not have a @code{load} command, attempting to
6979 execute it gets the error message ``@code{You can't do that when your
6980 target is @dots{}}''
6981 @end ifset
6982
6983 The file is loaded at whatever address is specified in the executable.
6984 For some object file formats, you can specify the load address when you
6985 link the program; for other formats, like a.out, the object file format
6986 specifies a fixed address.
6987 @c FIXME! This would be a good place for an xref to the GNU linker doc.
6988
6989 @ifset VXWORKS
6990 On VxWorks, @code{load} links @var{filename} dynamically on the
6991 current target system as well as adding its symbols in @value{GDBN}.
6992 @end ifset
6993
6994 @ifset I960
6995 @cindex download to Nindy-960
6996 With the Nindy interface to an Intel 960 board, @code{load}
6997 downloads @var{filename} to the 960 as well as adding its symbols in
6998 @value{GDBN}.
6999 @end ifset
7000
7001 @ifset H8
7002 @cindex download to H8/300 or H8/500
7003 @cindex H8/300 or H8/500 download
7004 @cindex download to Hitachi SH
7005 @cindex Hitachi SH download
7006 When you select remote debugging to a Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board
7007 (@pxref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}),
7008 the @code{load} command downloads your program to the Hitachi board and also
7009 opens it as the current executable target for @value{GDBN} on your host
7010 (like the @code{file} command).
7011 @end ifset
7012
7013 @code{load} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
7014
7015 @ifclear BARETARGET
7016 @item add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address}
7017 @itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
7018 @kindex add-symbol-file
7019 @cindex dynamic linking
7020 The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table information
7021 from the file @var{filename}. You would use this command when @var{filename}
7022 has been dynamically loaded (by some other means) into the program that
7023 is running. @var{address} should be the memory address at which the
7024 file has been loaded; @value{GDBN} cannot figure this out for itself.
7025 You can specify @var{address} as an expression.
7026
7027 The symbol table of the file @var{filename} is added to the symbol table
7028 originally read with the @code{symbol-file} command. You can use the
7029 @code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data thus
7030 read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data instead,
7031 use the @code{symbol-file} command.
7032
7033 @code{add-symbol-file} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
7034
7035 You can use the @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} options just as with
7036 the @code{symbol-file} command, to change how @value{GDBN} manages the symbol
7037 table information for @var{filename}.
7038 @end ifclear
7039
7040 @item info files
7041 @itemx info target
7042 @kindex info files
7043 @kindex info target
7044 @code{info files} and @code{info target} are synonymous; both print
7045 the current target (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}),
7046 including the
7047 @ifclear BARETARGET
7048 names of the executable and core dump files
7049 @end ifclear
7050 @ifset BARETARGET
7051 name of the executable file
7052 @end ifset
7053 currently in use by @value{GDBN}, and the files from which symbols were
7054 loaded. The command @code{help target} lists all possible targets
7055 rather than current ones.
7056 @end table
7057
7058 All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file names
7059 as arguments. @value{GDBN} always converts the file name to an absolute file
7060 name and remembers it that way.
7061
7062 @ifclear BARETARGET
7063 @cindex shared libraries
7064 @value{GDBN} supports SunOS, SVr4, Irix 5, and IBM RS/6000 shared libraries.
7065 @value{GDBN} automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
7066 when you use the @code{run} command, or when you examine a core file.
7067 (Before you issue the @code{run} command, @value{GDBN} does not understand
7068 references to a function in a shared library, however---unless you are
7069 debugging a core file).
7070 @c FIXME: some @value{GDBN} release may permit some refs to undef
7071 @c FIXME...symbols---eg in a break cmd---assuming they are from a shared
7072 @c FIXME...lib; check this from time to time when updating manual
7073
7074 @table @code
7075 @item info share
7076 @itemx info sharedlibrary
7077 @kindex info sharedlibrary
7078 @kindex info share
7079 Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded.
7080
7081 @item sharedlibrary @var{regex}
7082 @itemx share @var{regex}
7083 @kindex sharedlibrary
7084 @kindex share
7085 Load shared object library symbols for files matching a
7086 Unix regular expression.
7087 As with files loaded automatically, it only loads shared libraries
7088 required by your program for a core file or after typing @code{run}. If
7089 @var{regex} is omitted all shared libraries required by your program are
7090 loaded.
7091 @end table
7092 @end ifclear
7093
7094 @node Symbol Errors
7095 @section Errors reading symbol files
7096
7097 While reading a symbol file, @value{GDBN} occasionally encounters problems,
7098 such as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
7099 output. By default, @value{GDBN} does not notify you of such problems, since
7100 they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
7101 debugging compilers. If you are interested in seeing information
7102 about ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask @value{GDBN} to print
7103 only one message about each such type of problem, no matter how many
7104 times the problem occurs; or you can ask @value{GDBN} to print more messages,
7105 to see how many times the problems occur, with the @code{set
7106 complaints} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
7107 messages}).
7108
7109 The messages currently printed, and their meanings, include:
7110
7111 @table @code
7112 @item inner block not inside outer block in @var{symbol}
7113
7114 The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
7115 (such as at the start of a function or a block of statements). This
7116 error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully contained
7117 in its outer scope blocks.
7118
7119 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it had
7120 the same scope as the outer block. In the error message, @var{symbol}
7121 may be shown as ``@code{(don't know)}'' if the outer block is not a
7122 function.
7123
7124 @item block at @var{address} out of order
7125
7126 The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
7127 order of increasing addresses. This error indicates that it does not
7128 do so.
7129
7130 @value{GDBN} does not circumvent this problem, and has trouble
7131 locating symbols in the source file whose symbols it is reading. (You
7132 can often determine what source file is affected by specifying
7133 @code{set verbose on}. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
7134 messages}.)
7135
7136 @item bad block start address patched
7137
7138 The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
7139 smaller than the address of the preceding source line. This is known
7140 to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.
7141
7142 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
7143 starting on the previous source line.
7144
7145 @item bad string table offset in symbol @var{n}
7146
7147 @cindex foo
7148 Symbol number @var{n} contains a pointer into the string table which is
7149 larger than the size of the string table.
7150
7151 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
7152 name @code{foo}, which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
7153 with this name.
7154
7155 @item unknown symbol type @code{0x@var{nn}}
7156
7157 The symbol information contains new data types that @value{GDBN} does not yet
7158 know how to read. @code{0x@var{nn}} is the symbol type of the misunderstood
7159 information, in hexadecimal.
7160
7161 @value{GDBN} circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information. This
7162 usually allows you to debug your program, though certain symbols
7163 are not accessible. If you encounter such a problem and feel like
7164 debugging it, you can debug @code{@value{GDBP}} with itself, breakpoint on
7165 @code{complain}, then go up to the function @code{read_dbx_symtab} and
7166 examine @code{*bufp} to see the symbol.
7167
7168 @item stub type has NULL name
7169 @value{GDBN} could not find the full definition for
7170 @ifclear CONLY
7171 a struct or class.
7172 @end ifclear
7173 @ifset CONLY
7174 a struct.
7175 @end ifset
7176
7177 @ifclear CONLY
7178 @item const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got@dots{}
7179
7180 The symbol information for a C++ member function is missing some
7181 information that recent versions of the compiler should have output
7182 for it.
7183 @end ifclear
7184
7185 @item info mismatch between compiler and debugger
7186
7187 @value{GDBN} could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.
7188 @end table
7189
7190 @node Targets
7191 @chapter Specifying a Debugging Target
7192 @cindex debugging target
7193 @kindex target
7194
7195 A @dfn{target} is the execution environment occupied by your program.
7196 @ifclear BARETARGET
7197 Often, @value{GDBN} runs in the same host environment as your program; in
7198 that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when you
7199 use the @code{file} or @code{core} commands. When you need more
7200 flexibility---for example, running @value{GDBN} on a physically separate
7201 host, or controlling a standalone system over a serial port or a
7202 realtime system over a TCP/IP connection---you
7203 @end ifclear
7204 @ifset BARETARGET
7205 You
7206 @end ifset
7207 can use the @code{target} command to specify one of the target types
7208 configured for @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing
7209 targets}).
7210
7211 @menu
7212 * Active Targets:: Active targets
7213 * Target Commands:: Commands for managing targets
7214 * Remote:: Remote debugging
7215 @end menu
7216
7217 @node Active Targets
7218 @section Active targets
7219 @cindex stacking targets
7220 @cindex active targets
7221 @cindex multiple targets
7222
7223 @ifclear BARETARGET
7224 There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
7225 executable files. @value{GDBN} can work concurrently on up to three active
7226 targets, one in each class. This allows you to (for example) start a
7227 process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on a core
7228 file.
7229
7230 For example, if you execute @samp{gdb a.out}, then the executable file
7231 @code{a.out} is the only active target. If you designate a core file as
7232 well---presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped---then
7233 @value{GDBN} has two active targets and uses them in tandem, looking
7234 first in the corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy
7235 requests for memory addresses. (Typically, these two classes of target
7236 are complementary, since core files contain only a program's
7237 read-write memory---variables and so on---plus machine status, while
7238 executable files contain only the program text and initialized data.)
7239 @end ifclear
7240
7241 When you type @code{run}, your executable file becomes an active process
7242 target as well. When a process target is active, all @value{GDBN} commands
7243 requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in an
7244 @ifclear BARETARGET
7245 active core file or
7246 @end ifclear
7247 executable file target are obscured while the process
7248 target is active.
7249
7250 @ifset BARETARGET
7251 Use the @code{exec-file} command to select a
7252 new executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
7253 files}).
7254 @end ifset
7255 @ifclear BARETARGET
7256 Use the @code{core-file} and @code{exec-file} commands to select a
7257 new core file or executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
7258 files}). To specify as a target a process that is already running, use
7259 the @code{attach} command (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an
7260 already-running process}).
7261 @end ifclear
7262
7263 @node Target Commands
7264 @section Commands for managing targets
7265
7266 @table @code
7267 @item target @var{type} @var{parameters}
7268 Connects the @value{GDBN} host environment to a target
7269 @ifset BARETARGET
7270 machine.
7271 @end ifset
7272 @ifclear BARETARGET
7273 machine or process. A target is typically a protocol for talking to
7274 debugging facilities. You use the argument @var{type} to specify the
7275 type or protocol of the target machine.
7276
7277 Further @var{parameters} are interpreted by the target protocol, but
7278 typically include things like device names or host names to connect
7279 with, process numbers, and baud rates.
7280 @end ifclear
7281
7282 The @code{target} command does not repeat if you press @key{RET} again
7283 after executing the command.
7284
7285 @item help target
7286 @kindex help target
7287 Displays the names of all targets available. To display targets
7288 currently selected, use either @code{info target} or @code{info files}
7289 (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
7290
7291 @item help target @var{name}
7292 Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
7293 select it.
7294 @end table
7295
7296 Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
7297 configuration):
7298
7299 @table @code
7300 @item target exec @var{program}
7301 @kindex target exec
7302 An executable file. @samp{target exec @var{program}} is the same as
7303 @samp{exec-file @var{program}}.
7304
7305 @ifclear BARETARGET
7306 @item target core @var{filename}
7307 @kindex target core
7308 A core dump file. @samp{target core @var{filename}} is the same as
7309 @samp{core-file @var{filename}}.
7310 @end ifclear
7311
7312 @ifset REMOTESTUB
7313 @item target remote @var{dev}
7314 @kindex target remote
7315 Remote serial target in GDB-specific protocol. The argument @var{dev}
7316 specifies what serial device to use for the connection (e.g.
7317 @file{/dev/ttya}). @xref{Remote, ,Remote debugging}.
7318 @end ifset
7319
7320 @ifset SIMS
7321 @item target sim
7322 @kindex target sim
7323 CPU simulator. @xref{Simulator,,Simulated CPU Target}.
7324 @end ifset
7325
7326 @ifset AMD29K
7327 @item target udi @var{keyword}
7328 @kindex target udi
7329 Remote AMD29K target, using the AMD UDI protocol. The @var{keyword}
7330 argument specifies which 29K board or simulator to use. @xref{UDI29K
7331 Remote,,The UDI protocol for AMD29K}.
7332
7333 @item target amd-eb @var{dev} @var{speed} @var{PROG}
7334 @kindex target amd-eb
7335 @cindex AMD EB29K
7336 Remote PC-resident AMD EB29K board, attached over serial lines.
7337 @var{dev} is the serial device, as for @code{target remote};
7338 @var{speed} allows you to specify the linespeed; and @var{PROG} is the
7339 name of the program to be debugged, as it appears to DOS on the PC.
7340 @xref{EB29K Remote, ,The EBMON protocol for AMD29K}.
7341
7342 @end ifset
7343 @ifset H8
7344 @item target hms
7345 @kindex target hms
7346 A Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board, attached via serial line to your host.
7347 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
7348 @c Unix only, not currently of interest for H8-only manual
7349 Use special commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial
7350 line and the communications speed used.
7351 @end ifclear
7352 @xref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
7353
7354 @end ifset
7355 @ifset I960
7356 @item target nindy @var{devicename}
7357 @kindex target nindy
7358 An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor. @var{devicename} is
7359 the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
7360 @file{/dev/ttya}. @xref{i960-Nindy Remote, ,@value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)}.
7361
7362 @end ifset
7363 @ifset ST2000
7364 @item target st2000 @var{dev} @var{speed}
7365 @kindex target st2000
7366 A Tandem ST2000 phone switch, running Tandem's STDBUG protocol. @var{dev}
7367 is the name of the device attached to the ST2000 serial line;
7368 @var{speed} is the communication line speed. The arguments are not used
7369 if @value{GDBN} is configured to connect to the ST2000 using TCP or Telnet.
7370 @xref{ST2000 Remote,,@value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000}.
7371
7372 @end ifset
7373 @ifset VXWORKS
7374 @item target vxworks @var{machinename}
7375 @kindex target vxworks
7376 A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP. The argument @var{machinename}
7377 is the target system's machine name or IP address.
7378 @xref{VxWorks Remote, ,@value{GDBN} and VxWorks}.
7379 @end ifset
7380 @end table
7381
7382 @ifset GENERIC
7383 Different targets are available on different configurations of @value{GDBN}; your
7384 configuration may have more or fewer targets.
7385 @end ifset
7386
7387 @node Remote
7388 @section Remote debugging
7389 @cindex remote debugging
7390
7391 If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot run
7392 GDB in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging. For
7393 example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel, or on
7394 a small system which does not have a general purpose operating system
7395 powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
7396
7397 Some configurations of GDB have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
7398 to make this work with particular debugging targets. In addition,
7399 GDB comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to GDB, but
7400 not specific to any particular target system) which you can use if you
7401 write the remote stubs---the code that runs on the remote system to
7402 communicate with GDB.
7403
7404 Other remote targets may be available in your
7405 configuration of GDB; use @code{help target} to list them.
7406
7407 @ifset GENERIC
7408 @c Text on starting up GDB in various specific cases; it goes up front
7409 @c in manuals configured for any of those particular situations, here
7410 @c otherwise.
7411 @menu
7412 @ifset REMOTESTUB
7413 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
7414 @end ifset
7415 @ifset I960
7416 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
7417 @end ifset
7418 @ifset AMD29K
7419 * UDI29K Remote:: The UDI protocol for AMD29K
7420 * EB29K Remote:: The EBMON protocol for AMD29K
7421 @end ifset
7422 @ifset VXWORKS
7423 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
7424 @end ifset
7425 @ifset ST2000
7426 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
7427 @end ifset
7428 @ifset H8
7429 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
7430 @end ifset
7431 @ifset MIPS
7432 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
7433 @end ifset
7434 @ifset SIMS
7435 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
7436 @end ifset
7437 @end menu
7438
7439 @include remote.texi
7440 @end ifset
7441
7442 @node Controlling GDB
7443 @chapter Controlling @value{GDBN}
7444
7445 You can alter the way @value{GDBN} interacts with you by using
7446 the @code{set} command. For commands controlling how @value{GDBN} displays
7447 data, @pxref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}; other settings are described here.
7448
7449 @menu
7450 * Prompt:: Prompt
7451 * Editing:: Command editing
7452 * History:: Command history
7453 * Screen Size:: Screen size
7454 * Numbers:: Numbers
7455 * Messages/Warnings:: Optional warnings and messages
7456 @end menu
7457
7458 @node Prompt
7459 @section Prompt
7460 @cindex prompt
7461
7462 @value{GDBN} indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
7463 called the @dfn{prompt}. This string is normally @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. You
7464 can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command. For
7465 instance, when debugging @value{GDBN} with @value{GDBN}, it is useful to change
7466 the prompt in one of the @value{GDBN} sessions so that you can always tell which
7467 one you are talking to.
7468
7469 @table @code
7470 @item set prompt @var{newprompt}
7471 @kindex set prompt
7472 Directs @value{GDBN} to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
7473 @kindex show prompt
7474 @item show prompt
7475 Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
7476 @end table
7477
7478 @node Editing
7479 @section Command editing
7480 @cindex readline
7481 @cindex command line editing
7482
7483 @value{GDBN} reads its input commands via the @dfn{readline} interface. This
7484 GNU library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
7485 command line interface to the user. Advantages are @code{emacs}-style
7486 or @code{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
7487 substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
7488 debugging sessions.
7489
7490 You may control the behavior of command line editing in @value{GDBN} with the
7491 command @code{set}.
7492
7493 @table @code
7494 @kindex set editing
7495 @cindex editing
7496 @item set editing
7497 @itemx set editing on
7498 Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
7499
7500 @item set editing off
7501 Disable command line editing.
7502
7503 @kindex show editing
7504 @item show editing
7505 Show whether command line editing is enabled.
7506 @end table
7507
7508 @node History
7509 @section Command history
7510
7511 @value{GDBN} can keep track of the commands you type during your
7512 debugging sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what
7513 happened. Use these commands to manage the @value{GDBN} command
7514 history facility.
7515
7516 @table @code
7517 @cindex history substitution
7518 @cindex history file
7519 @kindex set history filename
7520 @kindex GDBHISTFILE
7521 @item set history filename @var{fname}
7522 Set the name of the @value{GDBN} command history file to @var{fname}.
7523 This is the file where @value{GDBN} reads an initial command history
7524 list, and where it writes the command history from this session when it
7525 exits. You can access this list through history expansion or through
7526 the history command editing characters listed below. This file defaults
7527 to the value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
7528 @file{./.gdb_history} if this variable is not set.
7529
7530 @cindex history save
7531 @kindex set history save
7532 @item set history save
7533 @itemx set history save on
7534 Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
7535 @code{set history filename} command. By default, this option is disabled.
7536
7537 @item set history save off
7538 Stop recording command history in a file.
7539
7540 @cindex history size
7541 @kindex set history size
7542 @item set history size @var{size}
7543 Set the number of commands which @value{GDBN} keeps in its history list.
7544 This defaults to the value of the environment variable
7545 @code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
7546 @end table
7547
7548 @cindex history expansion
7549 History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
7550 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7551 @xref{Event Designators}.
7552 @end ifset
7553
7554 Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
7555 is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
7556 @code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
7557 follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
7558 a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded. The readline
7559 history facilities do not attempt substitution on the strings
7560 @kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
7561
7562 The commands to control history expansion are:
7563
7564 @table @code
7565
7566 @kindex set history expansion
7567 @item set history expansion on
7568 @itemx set history expansion
7569 Enable history expansion. History expansion is off by default.
7570
7571 @item set history expansion off
7572 Disable history expansion.
7573
7574 The readline code comes with more complete documentation of
7575 editing and history expansion features. Users unfamiliar with @code{emacs}
7576 or @code{vi} may wish to read it.
7577 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7578 @xref{Command Line Editing}.
7579 @end ifset
7580
7581 @c @group
7582 @kindex show history
7583 @item show history
7584 @itemx show history filename
7585 @itemx show history save
7586 @itemx show history size
7587 @itemx show history expansion
7588 These commands display the state of the @value{GDBN} history parameters.
7589 @code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
7590 @c @end group
7591 @end table
7592
7593 @table @code
7594 @kindex show commands
7595 @item show commands
7596 Display the last ten commands in the command history.
7597
7598 @item show commands @var{n}
7599 Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
7600
7601 @item show commands +
7602 Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
7603 @end table
7604
7605 @node Screen Size
7606 @section Screen size
7607 @cindex size of screen
7608 @cindex pauses in output
7609
7610 Certain commands to @value{GDBN} may produce large amounts of
7611 information output to the screen. To help you read all of it,
7612 @value{GDBN} pauses and asks you for input at the end of each page of
7613 output. Type @key{RET} when you want to continue the output, or @kbd{q}
7614 to discard the remaining output. Also, the screen width setting
7615 determines when to wrap lines of output. Depending on what is being
7616 printed, @value{GDBN} tries to break the line at a readable place,
7617 rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
7618
7619 Normally @value{GDBN} knows the size of the screen from the termcap data base
7620 together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
7621 @code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings. If this is not correct,
7622 you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
7623 width} commands:
7624
7625 @table @code
7626 @item set height @var{lpp}
7627 @itemx show height
7628 @itemx set width @var{cpl}
7629 @itemx show width
7630 @kindex set height
7631 @kindex set width
7632 @kindex show width
7633 @kindex show height
7634 These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
7635 a screen width of @var{cpl} characters. The associated @code{show}
7636 commands display the current settings.
7637
7638 If you specify a height of zero lines, @value{GDBN} does not pause during output
7639 no matter how long the output is. This is useful if output is to a file
7640 or to an editor buffer.
7641
7642 Likewise, you can specify @samp{set width 0} to prevent @value{GDBN}
7643 from wrapping its output.
7644 @end table
7645
7646 @node Numbers
7647 @section Numbers
7648 @cindex number representation
7649 @cindex entering numbers
7650
7651 You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in @value{GDBN} by
7652 the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with @samp{0}, decimal
7653 numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers begin with @samp{0x}.
7654 Numbers that begin with none of these are, by default, entered in base
7655 10; likewise, the default display for numbers---when no particular
7656 format is specified---is base 10. You can change the default base for
7657 both input and output with the @code{set radix} command.
7658
7659 @table @code
7660 @kindex set radix
7661 @item set radix @var{base}
7662 Set the default base for numeric input and display. Supported choices
7663 for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
7664 specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix; for
7665 example, any of
7666
7667 @example
7668 set radix 012
7669 set radix 10.
7670 set radix 0xa
7671 @end example
7672
7673 @noindent
7674 sets the base to decimal. On the other hand, @samp{set radix 10}
7675 leaves the radix unchanged no matter what it was.
7676
7677 @kindex show radix
7678 @item show radix
7679 Display the current default base for numeric input and display.
7680 @end table
7681
7682 @node Messages/Warnings
7683 @section Optional warnings and messages
7684
7685 By default, @value{GDBN} is silent about its inner workings. If you are running
7686 on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose} command.
7687 It makes @value{GDBN} tell you when it does a lengthy internal operation, so
7688 you will not think it has crashed.
7689
7690 Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
7691 which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read;
7692 see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}.
7693
7694 @table @code
7695 @kindex set verbose
7696 @item set verbose on
7697 Enables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7698
7699 @item set verbose off
7700 Disables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7701
7702 @kindex show verbose
7703 @item show verbose
7704 Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
7705 @end table
7706
7707 By default, if @value{GDBN} encounters bugs in the symbol table of an object
7708 file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may find
7709 this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors reading symbol files}).
7710
7711 @table @code
7712 @kindex set complaints
7713 @item set complaints @var{limit}
7714 Permits @value{GDBN} to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of unusual
7715 symbols before becoming silent about the problem. Set @var{limit} to
7716 zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number to prevent
7717 complaints from being suppressed.
7718
7719 @kindex show complaints
7720 @item show complaints
7721 Displays how many symbol complaints @value{GDBN} is permitted to produce.
7722 @end table
7723
7724 By default, @value{GDBN} is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
7725 lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands. For example, if
7726 you try to run a program which is already running:
7727
7728 @example
7729 (@value{GDBP}) run
7730 The program being debugged has been started already.
7731 Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
7732 @end example
7733
7734 If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
7735 commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
7736
7737 @table @code
7738 @kindex set confirm
7739 @cindex flinching
7740 @cindex confirmation
7741 @cindex stupid questions
7742 @item set confirm off
7743 Disables confirmation requests.
7744
7745 @item set confirm on
7746 Enables confirmation requests (the default).
7747
7748 @item show confirm
7749 @kindex show confirm
7750 Displays state of confirmation requests.
7751 @end table
7752
7753 @c FIXME this does not really belong here. But where *does* it belong?
7754 @cindex reloading symbols
7755 Some systems allow individual object files that make up your program to
7756 be replaced without stopping and restarting your program.
7757 @ifset VXWORKS
7758 For example, in VxWorks you can simply recompile a defective object file
7759 and keep on running.
7760 @end ifset
7761 If you are running on one of these systems, you can allow @value{GDBN} to
7762 reload the symbols for automatically relinked modules:
7763
7764 @table @code
7765 @kindex set symbol-reloading
7766 @item set symbol-reloading on
7767 Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file when an
7768 object file with a particular name is seen again.
7769
7770 @item set symbol-reloading off
7771 Do not replace symbol definitions when re-encountering object files of
7772 the same name. This is the default state; if you are not running on a
7773 system that permits automatically relinking modules, you should leave
7774 @code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise @value{GDBN} may discard symbols
7775 when linking large programs, that may contain several modules (from
7776 different directories or libraries) with the same name.
7777
7778 @item show symbol-reloading
7779 Show the current @code{on} or @code{off} setting.
7780 @end table
7781
7782 @node Sequences
7783 @chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
7784
7785 Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
7786 command lists}), @value{GDBN} provides two ways to store sequences of commands
7787 for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command files.
7788
7789 @menu
7790 * Define:: User-defined commands
7791 * Hooks:: User-defined command hooks
7792 * Command Files:: Command files
7793 * Output:: Commands for controlled output
7794 @end menu
7795
7796 @node Define
7797 @section User-defined commands
7798
7799 @cindex user-defined command
7800 A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of @value{GDBN} commands to which you
7801 assign a new name as a command. This is done with the @code{define}
7802 command.
7803
7804 @table @code
7805 @item define @var{commandname}
7806 @kindex define
7807 Define a command named @var{commandname}. If there is already a command
7808 by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
7809
7810 The definition of the command is made up of other @value{GDBN} command lines,
7811 which are given following the @code{define} command. The end of these
7812 commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
7813
7814 @item if
7815 @kindex if
7816 @kindex else
7817 Takes a single argument, which is an expression to evaluate.
7818 It is followed by a series of commands that are executed
7819 only if the expression is true (nonzero).
7820 There can then optionally be a line @code{else}, followed
7821 by a series of commands that are only executed if the expression
7822 was false. The end of the list is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
7823
7824 @item while
7825 @kindex while
7826 The syntax is similar to @code{if}: The command takes a single argument,
7827 which is an expression to evaluate, and must be followed by the commands to
7828 execute, one per line, terminated by an @code{end}.
7829 The commands are executed repeatedly as long as the expression
7830 evaluates to true.
7831
7832 @item document @var{commandname}
7833 @kindex document
7834 Give documentation to the user-defined command @var{commandname}. The
7835 command @var{commandname} must already be defined. This command reads
7836 lines of documentation just as @code{define} reads the lines of the
7837 command definition, ending with @code{end}. After the @code{document}
7838 command is finished, @code{help} on command @var{commandname} displays
7839 the documentation you have specified.
7840
7841 You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
7842 documentation of a command. Redefining the command with @code{define}
7843 does not change the documentation.
7844
7845 @item help user-defined
7846 @kindex help user-defined
7847 List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
7848 (if any) for each.
7849
7850 @item show user
7851 @itemx show user @var{commandname}
7852 @kindex show user
7853 Display the @value{GDBN} commands used to define @var{commandname} (but not its
7854 documentation). If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
7855 definitions for all user-defined commands.
7856 @end table
7857
7858 User-defined commands may accept up to 10 arguments separated by whitespace.
7859 Arguments are accessed within the user command via @code{$arg0}..@code{$arg9}.
7860 A trivial example:
7861 @smallexample
7862 define adder
7863 print $arg0 + $arg1 + $arg2
7864 end
7865 @end smallexample
7866 Defines the command @code{adder} which prints the sum of its three arguments.
7867 To execute the command use:
7868 @smallexample
7869 adder 1 2 3
7870 @end smallexample
7871
7872 Note the arguments are text substitutions, so they may reference variables,
7873 use complex expressions, or even perform inferior function calls.
7874
7875 When user-defined commands are executed, the
7876 commands of the definition are not printed. An error in any command
7877 stops execution of the user-defined command.
7878
7879 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7880 without asking when used inside a user-defined command. Many @value{GDBN} commands
7881 that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7882 when used in a user-defined command.
7883
7884 @node Hooks
7885 @section User-defined command hooks
7886 @cindex command files
7887
7888 You may define @emph{hooks}, which are a special kind of user-defined
7889 command. Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined
7890 command @samp{hook-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments)
7891 before that command.
7892
7893 In addition, a pseudo-command, @samp{stop} exists. Defining
7894 (@samp{hook-stop}) makes the associated commands execute every time
7895 execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
7896 displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.
7897
7898 @ifclear BARETARGET
7899 For example, to ignore @code{SIGALRM} signals while
7900 single-stepping, but treat them normally during normal execution,
7901 you could define:
7902
7903 @example
7904 define hook-stop
7905 handle SIGALRM nopass
7906 end
7907
7908 define hook-run
7909 handle SIGALRM pass
7910 end
7911
7912 define hook-continue
7913 handle SIGLARM pass
7914 end
7915 @end example
7916 @end ifclear
7917
7918 You can define a hook for any single-word command in @value{GDBN}, but
7919 not for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
7920 name, e.g. @code{backtrace} rather than @code{bt}.
7921 @c FIXME! So how does Joe User discover whether a command is an alias
7922 @c or not?
7923 If an error occurs during the execution of your hook, execution of
7924 @value{GDBN} commands stops and @value{GDBN} issues a prompt
7925 (before the command that you actually typed had a chance to run).
7926
7927 If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command, you
7928 get a warning from the @code{define} command.
7929
7930 @node Command Files
7931 @section Command files
7932
7933 @cindex command files
7934 A command file for @value{GDBN} is a file of lines that are @value{GDBN} commands. Comments
7935 (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may also be included. An empty line in a
7936 command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat the last command, as
7937 it would from the terminal.
7938
7939 @cindex init file
7940 @cindex @file{@value{GDBINIT}}
7941 When you start @value{GDBN}, it automatically executes commands from its
7942 @dfn{init files}. These are files named @file{@value{GDBINIT}}.
7943 @value{GDBN} reads the init file (if any) in your home directory, then
7944 processes command line options and operands, and then reads the init
7945 file (if any) in the current working directory. This is so the init
7946 file in your home directory can set options (such as @code{set
7947 complaints}) which affect the processing of the command line options and
7948 operands. The init files are not executed if you use the @samp{-nx}
7949 option; @pxref{Mode Options, ,Choosing modes}.
7950
7951 @ifset GENERIC
7952 @cindex init file name
7953 On some configurations of @value{GDBN}, the init file is known by a
7954 different name (these are typically environments where a specialized
7955 form of GDB may need to coexist with other forms, hence a different name
7956 for the specialized version's init file). These are the environments
7957 with special init file names:
7958
7959 @itemize @bullet
7960 @kindex .vxgdbinit
7961 @item
7962 VxWorks (Wind River Systems real-time OS): @samp{.vxgdbinit}
7963
7964 @kindex .os68gdbinit
7965 @item
7966 OS68K (Enea Data Systems real-time OS): @samp{.os68gdbinit}
7967
7968 @kindex .esgdbinit
7969 @item
7970 ES-1800 (Ericsson Telecom AB M68000 emulator): @samp{.esgdbinit}
7971 @end itemize
7972 @end ifset
7973
7974 You can also request the execution of a command file with the
7975 @code{source} command:
7976
7977 @table @code
7978 @item source @var{filename}
7979 @kindex source
7980 Execute the command file @var{filename}.
7981 @end table
7982
7983 The lines in a command file are executed sequentially. They are not
7984 printed as they are executed. An error in any command terminates execution
7985 of the command file.
7986
7987 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7988 without asking when used in a command file. Many @value{GDBN} commands that
7989 normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7990 when called from command files.
7991
7992 @node Output
7993 @section Commands for controlled output
7994
7995 During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
7996 @value{GDBN} output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
7997 explicitly printed by the commands in the definition. This section
7998 describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
7999 want.
8000
8001 @table @code
8002 @item echo @var{text}
8003 @kindex echo
8004 @c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
8005 @c because it is not in ANSI.
8006 Print @var{text}. Nonprinting characters can be included in
8007 @var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
8008 newline. @strong{No newline is printed unless you specify one.}
8009 In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
8010 by a space stands for a space. This is useful for displaying a
8011 string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
8012 trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
8013 To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
8014 @samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
8015
8016 A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
8017 the command onto subsequent lines. For example,
8018
8019 @example
8020 echo This is some text\n\
8021 which is continued\n\
8022 onto several lines.\n
8023 @end example
8024
8025 produces the same output as
8026
8027 @example
8028 echo This is some text\n
8029 echo which is continued\n
8030 echo onto several lines.\n
8031 @end example
8032
8033 @item output @var{expression}
8034 @kindex output
8035 Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
8036 newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }. The value is not entered in the
8037 value history either. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on
8038 expressions.
8039
8040 @item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
8041 Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}. You can use
8042 the same formats as for @code{print}. @xref{Output Formats,,Output
8043 formats}, for more information.
8044
8045 @item printf @var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
8046 @kindex printf
8047 Print the values of the @var{expressions} under the control of
8048 @var{string}. The @var{expressions} are separated by commas and may be
8049 either numbers or pointers. Their values are printed as specified by
8050 @var{string}, exactly as if your program were to execute the C
8051 subroutine
8052
8053 @example
8054 printf (@var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
8055 @end example
8056
8057 For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
8058
8059 @smallexample
8060 printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
8061 @end smallexample
8062
8063 The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
8064 string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
8065 letter.
8066 @end table
8067
8068 @ifclear DOSHOST
8069 @node Emacs
8070 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
8071
8072 @cindex emacs
8073 A special interface allows you to use GNU Emacs to view (and
8074 edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
8075 @value{GDBN}.
8076
8077 To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs. Give the
8078 executable file you want to debug as an argument. This command starts
8079 @value{GDBN} as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
8080 created Emacs buffer.
8081
8082 Using @value{GDBN} under Emacs is just like using @value{GDBN} normally except for two
8083 things:
8084
8085 @itemize @bullet
8086 @item
8087 All ``terminal'' input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.
8088 @end itemize
8089
8090 This applies both to @value{GDBN} commands and their output, and to the input
8091 and output done by the program you are debugging.
8092
8093 This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
8094 commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
8095 in this way.
8096
8097 All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
8098 with your program. In particular, you can send signals the usual
8099 way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
8100 stop.
8101
8102 @itemize @bullet
8103 @item
8104 @value{GDBN} displays source code through Emacs.
8105 @end itemize
8106
8107 Each time @value{GDBN} displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
8108 source file for that frame and puts an arrow (@samp{=>}) at the
8109 left margin of the current line. Emacs uses a separate buffer for
8110 source display, and splits the screen to show both your @value{GDBN} session
8111 and the source.
8112
8113 Explicit @value{GDBN} @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
8114 usual, but you probably have no reason to use them from Emacs.
8115
8116 @quotation
8117 @emph{Warning:} If the directory where your program resides is not your
8118 current directory, it can be easy to confuse Emacs about the location of
8119 the source files, in which case the auxiliary display buffer does not
8120 appear to show your source. @value{GDBN} can find programs by searching your
8121 environment's @code{PATH} variable, so the @value{GDBN} input and output
8122 session proceeds normally; but Emacs does not get enough information
8123 back from @value{GDBN} to locate the source files in this situation. To
8124 avoid this problem, either start @value{GDBN} mode from the directory where
8125 your program resides, or specify an absolute file name when prompted for the
8126 @kbd{M-x gdb} argument.
8127
8128 A similar confusion can result if you use the @value{GDBN} @code{file} command to
8129 switch to debugging a program in some other location, from an existing
8130 @value{GDBN} buffer in Emacs.
8131 @end quotation
8132
8133 By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}. If
8134 you need to call @value{GDBN} by a different name (for example, if you keep
8135 several configurations around, with different names) you can set the
8136 Emacs variable @code{gdb-command-name}; for example,
8137
8138 @example
8139 (setq gdb-command-name "mygdb")
8140 @end example
8141
8142 @noindent
8143 (preceded by @kbd{ESC ESC}, or typed in the @code{*scratch*} buffer, or
8144 in your @file{.emacs} file) makes Emacs call the program named
8145 ``@code{mygdb}'' instead.
8146
8147 In the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
8148 addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
8149
8150 @table @kbd
8151 @item C-h m
8152 Describe the features of Emacs' @value{GDBN} Mode.
8153
8154 @item M-s
8155 Execute to another source line, like the @value{GDBN} @code{step} command; also
8156 update the display window to show the current file and location.
8157
8158 @item M-n
8159 Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
8160 calls, like the @value{GDBN} @code{next} command. Then update the display window
8161 to show the current file and location.
8162
8163 @item M-i
8164 Execute one instruction, like the @value{GDBN} @code{stepi} command; update
8165 display window accordingly.
8166
8167 @item M-x gdb-nexti
8168 Execute to next instruction, using the @value{GDBN} @code{nexti} command; update
8169 display window accordingly.
8170
8171 @item C-c C-f
8172 Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the @value{GDBN}
8173 @code{finish} command.
8174
8175 @item M-c
8176 Continue execution of your program, like the @value{GDBN} @code{continue}
8177 command.
8178
8179 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-p}.
8180
8181 @item M-u
8182 Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
8183 (@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}),
8184 like the @value{GDBN} @code{up} command.
8185
8186 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-u}.
8187
8188 @item M-d
8189 Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
8190 @value{GDBN} @code{down} command.
8191
8192 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-d}.
8193
8194 @item C-x &
8195 Read the number where the cursor is positioned, and insert it at the end
8196 of the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer. For example, if you wish to disassemble code
8197 around an address that was displayed earlier, type @kbd{disassemble};
8198 then move the cursor to the address display, and pick up the
8199 argument for @code{disassemble} by typing @kbd{C-x &}.
8200
8201 You can customize this further by defining elements of the list
8202 @code{gdb-print-command}; once it is defined, you can format or
8203 otherwise process numbers picked up by @kbd{C-x &} before they are
8204 inserted. A numeric argument to @kbd{C-x &} indicates that you
8205 wish special formatting, and also acts as an index to pick an element of the
8206 list. If the list element is a string, the number to be inserted is
8207 formatted using the Emacs function @code{format}; otherwise the number
8208 is passed as an argument to the corresponding list element.
8209 @end table
8210
8211 In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x SPC} (@code{gdb-break})
8212 tells @value{GDBN} to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
8213
8214 If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
8215 it back is to type the command @code{f} in the @value{GDBN} buffer, to
8216 request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this recreates
8217 the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
8218 frame.
8219
8220 The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
8221 which are visiting the source files in the usual way. You can edit
8222 the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that @value{GDBN}
8223 communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers. If you add or
8224 delete lines from the text, the line numbers that @value{GDBN} knows cease
8225 to correspond properly with the code.
8226
8227 @c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard. Reactivate
8228 @c if/when v19 does something similar. ---pesch@cygnus.com 19dec1990
8229 @ignore
8230 @kindex emacs epoch environment
8231 @kindex epoch
8232 @kindex inspect
8233
8234 Version 18 of Emacs has a built-in window system called the @code{epoch}
8235 environment. Users of this environment can use a new command,
8236 @code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
8237 each value is printed in its own window.
8238 @end ignore
8239 @end ifclear
8240
8241 @ifset LUCID
8242 @node Energize
8243 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Energize
8244
8245 @cindex Energize
8246 The Energize Programming System is an integrated development environment
8247 that includes a point-and-click interface to many programming tools.
8248 When you use @value{GDBN} in this environment, you can use the standard
8249 Energize graphical interface to drive @value{GDBN}; you can also, if you
8250 choose, type @value{GDBN} commands as usual in a debugging window. Even if
8251 you use the graphical interface, the debugging window (which uses Emacs,
8252 and resembles the standard Emacs interface to @value{GDBN}) displays the
8253 equivalent commands, so that the history of your debugging session is
8254 properly reflected.
8255
8256 When Energize starts up a @value{GDBN} session, it uses one of the
8257 command-line options @samp{-energize} or @samp{-cadillac} (``cadillac''
8258 is the name of the communications protocol used by the Energize system).
8259 This option makes @value{GDBN} run as one of the tools in the Energize Tool
8260 Set: it sends all output to the Energize kernel, and accept input from
8261 it as well.
8262
8263 See the user manual for the Energize Programming System for
8264 information on how to use the Energize graphical interface and the other
8265 development tools that Energize integrates with @value{GDBN}.
8266
8267 @end ifset
8268
8269 @node GDB Bugs
8270 @chapter Reporting Bugs in @value{GDBN}
8271 @cindex bugs in @value{GDBN}
8272 @cindex reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
8273
8274 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @value{GDBN} reliable.
8275
8276 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
8277 may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
8278 the entire community by making the next version of @value{GDBN} work better. Bug
8279 reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @value{GDBN}.
8280
8281 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8282 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8283
8284 @menu
8285 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8286 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8287 @end menu
8288
8289 @node Bug Criteria
8290 @section Have you found a bug?
8291 @cindex bug criteria
8292
8293 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8294
8295 @itemize @bullet
8296 @item
8297 @cindex fatal signal
8298 @cindex debugger crash
8299 @cindex crash of debugger
8300 If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8301 @value{GDBN} bug. Reliable debuggers never crash.
8302
8303 @item
8304 @cindex error on valid input
8305 If @value{GDBN} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8306
8307 @item
8308 @cindex invalid input
8309 If @value{GDBN} does not produce an error message for invalid input,
8310 that is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of
8311 ``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
8312 for traditional practice''.
8313
8314 @item
8315 If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
8316 for improvement of @value{GDBN} are welcome in any case.
8317 @end itemize
8318
8319 @node Bug Reporting
8320 @section How to report bugs
8321 @cindex bug reports
8322 @cindex @value{GDBN} bugs, reporting
8323
8324 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
8325 If you obtained @value{GDBN} from a support organization, we recommend you
8326 contact that organization first.
8327
8328 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8329 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the GNU Emacs
8330 distribution.
8331
8332 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @value{GDBN} to one
8333 of these addresses:
8334
8335 @example
8336 bug-gdb@@prep.ai.mit.edu
8337 @{ucbvax|mit-eddie|uunet@}!prep.ai.mit.edu!bug-gdb
8338 @end example
8339
8340 @strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
8341 @samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.} Most users of @value{GDBN} do not want to
8342 receive bug reports. Those that do, have arranged to receive @samp{bug-gdb}.
8343
8344 The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
8345 serves as a repeater. The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
8346 the same messages. Often people think of posting bug reports to the
8347 newsgroup instead of mailing them. This appears to work, but it has one
8348 problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
8349 path back to the sender. Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
8350 we may be unable to reach you. For this reason, it is better to send
8351 bug reports to the mailing list.
8352
8353 As a last resort, send bug reports on paper to:
8354
8355 @example
8356 GNU Debugger Bugs
8357 Free Software Foundation
8358 545 Tech Square
8359 Cambridge, MA 02139
8360 @end example
8361
8362 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8363 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8364 fact or leave it out, state it!
8365
8366 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8367 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8368 assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
8369 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a
8370 stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
8371 name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
8372 of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
8373 the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the
8374 easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
8375
8376 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8377 the bug if it is new to us. It is not as important as what happens if
8378 the bug is already known. Therefore, always write your bug reports on
8379 the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8380
8381 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8382 bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
8383 @emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
8384 bugs properly.
8385
8386 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8387
8388 @itemize @bullet
8389 @item
8390 The version of @value{GDBN}. @value{GDBN} announces it if you start with no
8391 arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show version}.
8392
8393 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8394 the bug in the current version of @value{GDBN}.
8395
8396 @item
8397 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8398 version number.
8399
8400 @item
8401 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @value{GDBN}---e.g.
8402 ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
8403
8404 @item
8405 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you
8406 are debugging---e.g. ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
8407
8408 @item
8409 The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
8410 observe the bug. For example, did you use @samp{-O}? To guarantee
8411 you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy of the
8412 Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8413
8414 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8415 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8416
8417 @item
8418 A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
8419 reproduce the bug.
8420
8421 @item
8422 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8423 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8424
8425 Of course, if the bug is that @value{GDBN} gets a fatal signal, then we will
8426 certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8427 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. We are human, after all. You
8428 might as well not give us a chance to make a mistake.
8429
8430 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8431 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as,
8432 your copy of @value{GDBN} is out of synch, or you have encountered a
8433 bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy
8434 might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash,
8435 then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not
8436 happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we
8437 would not be able to draw any conclusion from our observations.
8438
8439 @item
8440 If you wish to suggest changes to the @value{GDBN} source, send us context
8441 diffs. If you even discuss something in the @value{GDBN} source, refer to
8442 it by context, not by line number.
8443
8444 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8445 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8446 @end itemize
8447
8448 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8449
8450 @itemize @bullet
8451 @item
8452 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8453
8454 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8455 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8456 changes will not affect it.
8457
8458 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8459 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8460 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8461 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8462
8463 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8464 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8465 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8466 less time, and so on.
8467
8468 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8469 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8470
8471 @item
8472 A patch for the bug.
8473
8474 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8475 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8476 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8477 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8478
8479 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @value{GDBN} it is very hard to
8480 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8481 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
8482 to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8483
8484 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8485 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8486 help us to understand.
8487
8488 @item
8489 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8490
8491 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8492 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8493 @end itemize
8494
8495 @c The readline documentation is distributed with the readline code
8496 @c and consists of the two following files:
8497 @c rluser.texinfo
8498 @c inc-hist.texi
8499 @c Use -I with makeinfo to point to the appropriate directory,
8500 @c environment var TEXINPUTS with TeX.
8501 @include rluser.texinfo
8502 @include inc-hist.texi
8503
8504 @ifset NOVEL
8505 @node Renamed Commands
8506 @appendix Renamed Commands
8507
8508 The following commands were renamed in GDB 4, in order to make the
8509 command set as a whole more consistent and easier to use and remember:
8510
8511 @kindex add-syms
8512 @kindex delete environment
8513 @kindex info copying
8514 @kindex info convenience
8515 @kindex info directories
8516 @kindex info editing
8517 @kindex info history
8518 @kindex info targets
8519 @kindex info values
8520 @kindex info version
8521 @kindex info warranty
8522 @kindex set addressprint
8523 @kindex set arrayprint
8524 @kindex set prettyprint
8525 @kindex set screen-height
8526 @kindex set screen-width
8527 @kindex set unionprint
8528 @kindex set vtblprint
8529 @kindex set demangle
8530 @kindex set asm-demangle
8531 @kindex set sevenbit-strings
8532 @kindex set array-max
8533 @kindex set caution
8534 @kindex set history write
8535 @kindex show addressprint
8536 @kindex show arrayprint
8537 @kindex show prettyprint
8538 @kindex show screen-height
8539 @kindex show screen-width
8540 @kindex show unionprint
8541 @kindex show vtblprint
8542 @kindex show demangle
8543 @kindex show asm-demangle
8544 @kindex show sevenbit-strings
8545 @kindex show array-max
8546 @kindex show caution
8547 @kindex show history write
8548 @kindex unset
8549
8550 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8551 @ifinfo
8552 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8553 @example
8554 OLD COMMAND NEW COMMAND
8555 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8556 --------------- -------------------------------
8557 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8558 add-syms add-symbol-file
8559 delete environment unset environment
8560 info convenience show convenience
8561 info copying show copying
8562 info directories show directories
8563 info editing show commands
8564 info history show values
8565 info targets help target
8566 info values show values
8567 info version show version
8568 info warranty show warranty
8569 set/show addressprint set/show print address
8570 set/show array-max set/show print elements
8571 set/show arrayprint set/show print array
8572 set/show asm-demangle set/show print asm-demangle
8573 set/show caution set/show confirm
8574 set/show demangle set/show print demangle
8575 set/show history write set/show history save
8576 set/show prettyprint set/show print pretty
8577 set/show screen-height set/show height
8578 set/show screen-width set/show width
8579 set/show sevenbit-strings set/show print sevenbit-strings
8580 set/show unionprint set/show print union
8581 set/show vtblprint set/show print vtbl
8582
8583 unset [No longer an alias for delete]
8584 @end example
8585 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8586 @end ifinfo
8587
8588 @tex
8589 \vskip \parskip\vskip \baselineskip
8590 \halign{\tt #\hfil &\qquad#&\tt #\hfil\cr
8591 {\bf Old Command} &&{\bf New Command}\cr
8592 add-syms &&add-symbol-file\cr
8593 delete environment &&unset environment\cr
8594 info convenience &&show convenience\cr
8595 info copying &&show copying\cr
8596 info directories &&show directories \cr
8597 info editing &&show commands\cr
8598 info history &&show values\cr
8599 info targets &&help target\cr
8600 info values &&show values\cr
8601 info version &&show version\cr
8602 info warranty &&show warranty\cr
8603 set{\rm / }show addressprint &&set{\rm / }show print address\cr
8604 set{\rm / }show array-max &&set{\rm / }show print elements\cr
8605 set{\rm / }show arrayprint &&set{\rm / }show print array\cr
8606 set{\rm / }show asm-demangle &&set{\rm / }show print asm-demangle\cr
8607 set{\rm / }show caution &&set{\rm / }show confirm\cr
8608 set{\rm / }show demangle &&set{\rm / }show print demangle\cr
8609 set{\rm / }show history write &&set{\rm / }show history save\cr
8610 set{\rm / }show prettyprint &&set{\rm / }show print pretty\cr
8611 set{\rm / }show screen-height &&set{\rm / }show height\cr
8612 set{\rm / }show screen-width &&set{\rm / }show width\cr
8613 set{\rm / }show sevenbit-strings &&set{\rm / }show print sevenbit-strings\cr
8614 set{\rm / }show unionprint &&set{\rm / }show print union\cr
8615 set{\rm / }show vtblprint &&set{\rm / }show print vtbl\cr
8616 \cr
8617 unset &&\rm(No longer an alias for delete)\cr
8618 }
8619 @end tex
8620 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8621 @end ifset
8622
8623 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
8624 @node Formatting Documentation
8625 @appendix Formatting Documentation
8626
8627 @cindex GDB reference card
8628 @cindex reference card
8629 The GDB 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
8630 for printing with PostScript or Ghostscript, in the @file{gdb}
8631 subdirectory of the main source directory@footnote{In
8632 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version @value{GDBVN}
8633 release.}. If you can use PostScript or Ghostscript with your printer,
8634 you can print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
8635
8636 The release also includes the source for the reference card. You
8637 can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
8638
8639 @example
8640 make refcard.dvi
8641 @end example
8642
8643 The GDB reference card is designed to print in landscape mode on US
8644 ``letter'' size paper; that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
8645 high. You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
8646 your @sc{dvi} output program.
8647
8648 @cindex documentation
8649
8650 All the documentation for GDB comes as part of the machine-readable
8651 distribution. The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
8652 a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
8653 on-line information and a printed manual. You can use one of the Info
8654 formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
8655 and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
8656
8657 GDB includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info version of
8658 this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory. The main Info file is
8659 @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
8660 subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory. If
8661 necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
8662 but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in GNU Emacs
8663 or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the GNU
8664 Texinfo distribution.
8665
8666 If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
8667 Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
8668 @code{makeinfo}.
8669
8670 If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level GDB
8671 source directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, in the case of version @value{GDBVN}), you can
8672 make the Info file by typing:
8673
8674 @example
8675 cd gdb
8676 make gdb.info
8677 @end example
8678
8679 If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need @TeX{},
8680 a program to print its @sc{dvi} output files, and @file{texinfo.tex}, the
8681 Texinfo definitions file.
8682
8683 @TeX{} is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
8684 produces output files called @sc{dvi} files. To print a typeset
8685 document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files. If your system
8686 has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program. The precise
8687 command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
8688 (for PostScript devices) is @kbd{dvips}. The @sc{dvi} print command may
8689 require a file name without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
8690
8691 @TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
8692 @file{texinfo.tex}. This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
8693 written in Texinfo format. On its own, @TeX{} cannot read, much less
8694 typeset a Texinfo file. @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
8695 and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
8696 directory.
8697
8698 If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
8699 typeset and print this manual. First switch to the the @file{gdb}
8700 subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
8701 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb}) and then type:
8702
8703 @example
8704 make gdb.dvi
8705 @end example
8706
8707 @node Installing GDB
8708 @appendix Installing GDB
8709 @cindex configuring GDB
8710 @cindex installation
8711
8712 GDB comes with a @code{configure} script that automates the process
8713 of preparing GDB for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
8714 build the @code{gdb} program.
8715 @iftex
8716 @c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
8717 @footnote{If you have a more recent version of GDB than @value{GDBVN},
8718 look at the @file{README} file in the sources; we may have improved the
8719 installation procedures since publishing this manual.}
8720 @end iftex
8721
8722 The GDB distribution includes all the source code you need for GDB in
8723 a single directory, whose name is usually composed by appending the
8724 version number to @samp{gdb}.
8725
8726 For example, the GDB version @value{GDBVN} distribution is in the
8727 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory. That directory contains:
8728
8729 @table @code
8730 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
8731 script for configuring GDB and all its supporting libraries.
8732
8733 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb
8734 the source specific to GDB itself
8735
8736 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8737 source for the Binary File Descriptor library
8738
8739 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/include
8740 GNU include files
8741
8742 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/libiberty
8743 source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
8744
8745 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/opcodes
8746 source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers
8747
8748 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/readline
8749 source for the GNU command-line interface
8750
8751 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/glob
8752 source for the GNU filename pattern-matching subroutine
8753
8754 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/mmalloc
8755 source for the GNU memory-mapped malloc package
8756 @end table
8757
8758 The simplest way to configure and build GDB is to run @code{configure}
8759 from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
8760 this example is the @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.
8761
8762 First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
8763 if you are not already in it; then run @code{configure}. Pass the
8764 identifier for the platform on which GDB will run as an
8765 argument.
8766
8767 For example:
8768
8769 @example
8770 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8771 ./configure @var{host}
8772 make
8773 @end example
8774
8775 @noindent
8776 where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
8777 @samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where GDB will run.
8778 (You can often leave off @var{host}; @code{configure} tries to guess the
8779 correct value by examining your system.)
8780
8781 Running @samp{configure @var{host}} and then running @code{make} builds the
8782 @file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
8783 libraries, then @code{gdb} itself. The configured source files, and the
8784 binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
8785
8786 @code{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
8787 system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
8788 shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
8789
8790 @example
8791 sh configure @var{host}
8792 @end example
8793
8794 If you run @code{configure} from a directory that contains source
8795 directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
8796 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} source directory for version @value{GDBVN}, @code{configure}
8797 creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
8798 you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
8799
8800 You can run the @code{configure} script from any of the
8801 subordinate directories in the GDB distribution if you only want to
8802 configure that subdirectory, but be sure to specify a path to it.
8803
8804 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, type the following to configure only
8805 the @code{bfd} subdirectory:
8806
8807 @example
8808 @group
8809 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8810 ../configure @var{host}
8811 @end group
8812 @end example
8813
8814 You can install @code{@value{GDBP}} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
8815 However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
8816 the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable. Remember
8817 that GDB uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
8818 let GDB debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
8819
8820 @menu
8821 * Separate Objdir:: Compiling GDB in another directory
8822 * Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
8823 * configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
8824 @end menu
8825
8826 @node Separate Objdir
8827 @section Compiling GDB in another directory
8828
8829 If you want to run GDB versions for several host or target machines,
8830 you need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
8831 host and target. @code{configure} is designed to make this easy by
8832 allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
8833 rather than in the source directory. If your @code{make} program
8834 handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (GNU @code{make} does), running
8835 @code{make} in each of these directories builds the @code{gdb}
8836 program specified there.
8837
8838 To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @code{configure}
8839 with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
8840 (You also need to specify a path to find @code{configure}
8841 itself from your working directory. If the path to @code{configure}
8842 would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
8843 the @samp{--srcdir} option; it is assumed.)
8844
8845 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, you can build GDB in a separate
8846 directory for a Sun 4 like this:
8847
8848 @example
8849 @group
8850 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8851 mkdir ../gdb-sun4
8852 cd ../gdb-sun4
8853 ../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure sun4
8854 make
8855 @end group
8856 @end example
8857
8858 When @code{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
8859 directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
8860 (and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory. In
8861 the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
8862 directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and GDB itself in
8863 @file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
8864
8865 One popular reason to build several GDB configurations in separate
8866 directories is to configure GDB for cross-compiling (where GDB
8867 runs on one machine---the host---while debugging programs that run on
8868 another machine---the target). You specify a cross-debugging target by
8869 giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @code{configure}.
8870
8871 When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
8872 it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
8873 called @code{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
8874
8875 The @code{Makefile} that @code{configure} generates in each source
8876 directory also runs recursively. If you type @code{make} in a source
8877 directory such as @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} (or in a separate configured
8878 directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{dirname}/gdb-@value{GDBVN}}), you
8879 will build all the required libraries, and then build GDB.
8880
8881 When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
8882 directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
8883 if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
8884 with each other.
8885
8886 @node Config Names
8887 @section Specifying names for hosts and targets
8888
8889 The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @code{configure}
8890 script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
8891 aliases are also supported. The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
8892 of information in the following pattern:
8893
8894 @example
8895 @var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
8896 @end example
8897
8898 For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument,
8899 or as the value for @var{target} in a @code{--target=@var{target}}
8900 option. The equivalent full name is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
8901
8902 The @code{configure} script accompanying GDB does not provide
8903 any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
8904 aliases. @code{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
8905 @code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
8906 script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
8907 abbreviations---for example:
8908
8909 @smallexample
8910 % sh config.sub sun4
8911 sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1
8912 % sh config.sub sun3
8913 m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1
8914 % sh config.sub decstation
8915 mips-dec-ultrix4.2
8916 % sh config.sub hp300bsd
8917 m68k-hp-bsd
8918 % sh config.sub i386v
8919 i386-unknown-sysv
8920 % sh config.sub i786v
8921 Invalid configuration `i786v': machine `i786v' not recognized
8922 @end smallexample
8923
8924 @noindent
8925 @code{config.sub} is also distributed in the GDB source
8926 directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, for version @value{GDBVN}).
8927
8928 @node configure Options
8929 @section @code{configure} options
8930
8931 Here is a summary of the @code{configure} options and arguments that
8932 are most often useful for building @value{GDBN}. @code{configure} also has
8933 several other options not listed here. @inforef{What Configure
8934 Does,,configure.info}, for a full explanation of @code{configure}.
8935 @c FIXME: Would this be more, or less, useful as an xref (ref to printed
8936 @c manual in the printed manual, ref to info file only from the info file)?
8937
8938 @example
8939 configure @r{[}--help@r{]}
8940 @r{[}--prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
8941 @r{[}--srcdir=@var{dirname}@r{]}
8942 @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
8943 @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]} @var{host}
8944 @end example
8945
8946 @noindent
8947 You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
8948 @samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
8949 @samp{--}.
8950
8951 @table @code
8952 @item --help
8953 Display a quick summary of how to invoke @code{configure}.
8954
8955 @item -prefix=@var{dir}
8956 Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
8957 @file{@var{dir}}.
8958
8959 @c avoid splitting the warning from the explanation:
8960 @need 2000
8961 @item --srcdir=@var{dirname}
8962 @strong{Warning: using this option requires GNU @code{make}, or another
8963 @code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
8964 Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
8965 GDB source directories. Among other things, you can use this to
8966 build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
8967 directories. @code{configure} writes configuration specific files in
8968 the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
8969 directory @var{dirname}. @code{configure} creates directories under
8970 the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
8971 @var{dirname}.
8972
8973 @item --norecursion
8974 Configure only the directory level where @code{configure} is executed; do not
8975 propagate configuration to subdirectories.
8976
8977 @item --rm
8978 @emph{Remove} files otherwise built during configuration.
8979
8980 @c This does not work (yet if ever). FIXME.
8981 @c @item --parse=@var{lang} @dots{}
8982 @c Configure the GDB expression parser to parse the listed languages.
8983 @c @samp{all} configures GDB for all supported languages. To get a
8984 @c list of all supported languages, omit the argument. Without this
8985 @c option, GDB is configured to parse all supported languages.
8986
8987 @item --target=@var{target}
8988 Configure GDB for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
8989 @var{target}. Without this option, GDB is configured to debug
8990 programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as GDB itself.
8991
8992 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
8993
8994 @item @var{host} @dots{}
8995 Configure GDB to run on the specified @var{host}.
8996
8997 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
8998 @end table
8999
9000 @noindent
9001 @code{configure} accepts other options, for compatibility with
9002 configuring other GNU tools recursively; but these are the only
9003 options that affect GDB or its supporting libraries.
9004 @end ifclear
9005
9006 @node Index
9007 @unnumbered Index
9008
9009 @printindex cp
9010
9011 @tex
9012 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
9013 % meantime:
9014 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
9015 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
9016 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
9017 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
9018 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
9019 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/},}
9020 \centerline{{\bf\fontname\tenbf}, and}
9021 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
9022 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
9023 \page\colophon
9024 % Blame: pesch@cygnus.com, 1991.
9025 @end tex
9026
9027 @contents
9028 @bye